Catalogue. Merlin Gerin Compact LV circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors 80 to 3200A
|
|
|
- Suzan Owens
- 9 years ago
- Views:
Transcription
1 Catalogue 01 Merlin Gerin Compact LV circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors 80 to 300A
2 Compact NS 80 A Compact NS 100 to 50 A Things will never be the same Compact NS 400 to 630 A New Compact NS, setting the standard, once again... The launch of Merlin Gerin Compact NS in 1994 revolutionised the world of moulded-case circuit breakers. Innovative, flexible and attractive, Compact NS rapidly set the standard in its field. Compact NS 630 to 1600 A Today, Schneider Electric continues to innovate, extending the Compact NS range to high power ratings to offer a comprehensive and consistent range from 80 to 300 A. Equipped with the new generation of Micrologic control units, Compact NS630b to 300 circuit breakers integrate electrical measurement and analysis functions. The communications option makes it possible to control power consumption, simplify maintenance and improve operating comfort. Compact NS 1600 to 300 A A wide range of optimised auxiliaries and accessories is also available to meet the needs of even more applications. Compact NS, simply a step ahead
3 ...a solution for all installation configurations Manual Compact NS50 with thermal-magnetic trip unit Compact NS50 with motor mechanism Withdrawable Compact NS50 on chassis...simplified installation Connection parts for Compact NS...optimised protection and accurate measurements...an optimised range Compact NS1600 Micrologic.0, 5.0 Micrologic.0 A, 5.0 A, 6.0 A, 7.0 A
4 General contents Introduction 6 1 Functions and characteristics 15 Installation recommendations Dimensions Connection Electrical diagrams 09 6 Additional characteristics 37 7 Catalogue numbers 51 8 More information about Schneider Electric 93 9
5 Compact NS, even more applications... 1 Protection of LV distribution systems Page 18 Protection for: Distribution systems supplied by transformers Distribution systems supplied by engine generator sets Long cables in IT and TN systems. Installation : In power switchboards Special applications: Single-phase and two-phase systems (see page 36) 1000 V distribution systems (see page 38) 400 Hz distribution systems (see page 40) DC systems (see page 4). All circuit breakers in the Compact NS range offer positive contact indication and are suitable for isolation in compliance with standards IEC and. Protection of motor feeders Page 44 When combined with a motor starter, Compact NS circuit breakers protect the cables and the starter against short-circuits. Equipped with an electronic trip unit, Compact NS circuit breakers also protect the cables, starter and motor against overloads. The exceptional current-limiting capacity of Compact NS circuit breakers automatically ensures type- coordination with the motor starter, in compliance with standard IEC Protection of industrial control panels Page 5 The different circuit-breaker versions in the Compact NS range are designed to meet the specific requirements of machines: Compliance with international standards IEC and UL 508 / CSA - No. 14 Compliance with U.S. standard UL 489 Protection against overloads and short-circuits Positive contact indication Installation in universal and functional enclosures. Earth-leakage protection Page 54 Additional earth-leakage protection protects life and property against the risks of faulty insulation in the installation. Depending on the circuit breaker, earth-leakage protection is provided by: Adding a Vigi module to the circuit breaker Using a specific Micrologic control unit Using a Vigirex relay and separate toroids. 6
6 Switch-disconnectors Page 58 A switch-disconnector version of Compact NS circuit breakers exists for circuit control and isolation. All the additional functions may be combined with the basic switch-disconnector function, including: Earth-leakage protection Motor mechanism Ammeter, etc. For information on other switch-disconnector ranges, see the Interpact (offering positive contact indication and visible break) and Fupact (fuse switch) catalogues. 1 Source-changeover systems Page 66 (see also the "Source-changeover systems" catalogue) N R To ensure a continuous supply of power, some electrical installations are connected to two power sources: A normal source A replacement source on hand to supply the installation when the normal source is not available. A mechanical and/or electrical interlocking system between two Interpact, Compact or Masterpact devices avoids all risk of parallel connection of the sources during switching. A source-changeover system can be: Manual with mechanical interlocking between the devices Remote operated when an electrical interlocking function in added Automatic when a controller is added to manage switching from one source to the other on the basis of external parameters. UL 489 applications Compact NS circuit breakers also meet the requirements of applications governed by standard UL 489 (see the corresponding catalogue). 7
7 ...a solution for all installation configurations 1 The Compact NS range now covers all ratings from 80 to 300 A: Compact NS80 to 1600 A, fixed, withdrawable, front or rear connections, manual or electrical operation. Compact NS1600 to 300 A, fixed, front connection, manual operation. Compact NS100 to 630 Breaking capacity Icu at 415 V compact NS 50 N Ui750V Ue (V) 0/40 380/ / Uimp8kV Icu (ka) The rating plates on the front panel of each device indicate the breaking capacity (N, H or L). Ics = 100 % Icu IEC 947- cat A UTE VDE BS CEI UNE NEMA N: standard breaking capacity compact NS 50 H Ui750V Ue (V) 0/40 380/ / Uimp8kV Icu (ka) Ics = 100 % Icu IEC 947- cat A UTE VDE BS CEI UNE NEMA H: high breaking capacity Compact NS630b to 1600 Breaking capacity Icu at 415 V compact NS 50 L Ui750V Ue (V) 0/40 380/ / Uimp8kV Icu (ka) Ics = 100 % Icu IEC 947- cat A UTE VDE BS CEI UNE NEMA L: very high breaking capacity Total discrimination as standard Compact NS1600b to 300 Breaking capacity Icu at 415 V Discrimination between Compact NS circuit breakers is total for all types of faults (overloads, high or low shortcircuits) and whatever the type of trip unit used with the circuit breaker. 8
8 1 Manual Compact NS50 with thermal-magnetic trip unit Compact NS50 with motor mechanism Plug-in Compact NS50 on base Compact NS400 with electronic trip unit Withdrawable Compact NS50 on chassis Manually operated Compact NS800 Electrically operated Compact NS800 Compact NS000 (manually operated only) 9
9 ...simplified installation 1 Compact circuit breakers make it possible to standardise switchboards for faster installation. All type L Compact circuit breakers (150 ka) are housed in the same case as the type N and type H models with the same ratings. Compact circuit breakers up to 1600 A can be easily installed side-by-side in a minimum amount of space. 5 frame sizes from 80 to 300 A 80 A 100 to 50 A 400 to 630 A 630 to 1600 A 1600 to 300 A Many connection possibilities Numerous connection possibilities, including front and rear connections for bare cables, cable lugs or bars, as well as plug-in or withdrawable versions, are available using accessories that can be rapidly added to the circuit breaker. Connection parts for Compact NS Plug-in and withdrawable versions Plug-in and withdrawable versions for: c Fast removal or insertion of the circuit breaker without exposure to live parts c Standby outgoing circuits ready for wiring and circuit breaker installation at a later date c Visible break possibility. Busways Compact NS circuit breakers up to 630 A can be installed in tap-off units of the Telemecanique Canalis range of busbar trunking. 10
10 ...optimised protection and accurate measurements Each Compact NS circuit breaker provides different types of protection, depending on the trip unit or control unit selected. Additional measurement and indication functions are available: c On Compact NS100 to 630, by adding an electrical auxiliary to the circuit breaker c On Compact NS630b to 300, depending on the Micrologic control unit selected. Compact NS100 to 630 On Compact NS100 to NS50 circuit breakers, the thermal-magnetic and electronic trip units are interchangeable and may be rapidly fitted to the circuit breakers. It is therefore easy to change the protection of a given circuit following a modification in an installation. On Compact NS400 and NS630 circuit breakers, the electronic trip units are interchangeable, plug-in modules. The STR53UE trip unit offers a large number of protection settings: Standard: Specific indication of the different types of faults (overloads, short-circuits, etc.) Optional: Built-in ammeter Earth-fault protection Communication: transmission of all information concerning circuit-breaker operation to an electrical distribution control, monitoring and automation system via Digipact modules (see page 70) 1 TM thermal-magnetic trip unit Voltage presence indication module Compact NS50 STR electronic trip unit Ammeter module Compact NS630b to 300 Compact NS630b to 300 circuit breakers are equipped with Micrologic control units that are interchangeable on site. Micrologic.0 and.0 A control units offer standard protection. Micrologic 5.0 and 5.0 A control units offer selective protection that can be completed by earth-fault protection on Micrologic 6.0 A and earth-leakage protection on Micrologic 7.0 A control units. The ammeter version of Micrologic control units provides current measurements. These units are equipped with a digital display and bargraph, used in conjunction with simple navigation buttons. Access to the desired parameters and settings is direct and navigation between screens is intuitive. Settings are greatly simplified by direct display on the screen. Compact NS1600 Micrologic.0, 5.0 Micrologic.0 A, 5.0 A, 6.0 A, 7.0 A 11
11 ...an optimised range 1 A complete system of add-on modules for Compact NS: Fewer catalogue numbers means immediate availability of parts for all solutions. Trip units, control units, auxiliaries and installation and connection accessories are the same for a given frame size and often for a number of frame sizes (e.g. auxiliary contacts, MN and M voltage releases, etc.): Compact NS80 Compact NS100 to NS50 Compact NS400 to NS630 Compact NS630b to 1600 Compact 1600b to Breaking unit Trip units or control units 3 Vigi earth-leakage protection module 4 Insulation monitoring module 5 Voltage presence indicator 6 Ammeter module 7 MN and M voltage releases 8 Multifunction auxiliary contact 9 Direct rotary handle 10 Extended rotary handle 11 Motor mechanism 1 Plug-in base 13 Connection of auxiliary circuits to plug-in base or withdrawable chassis 14 Connection accessories 15 Short terminal shields 16 Long terminal shields 1
12 ...modern products Open communication... Equipped with a communications option, Compact NS circuit breakers fit perfectly in the Digipact installation management system or other supervision systems. Via a PC or a PLC, the operator can: Display the status of each circuit breaker and its settings Control the circuit breakers Display faults Access measurements supplied by the electronic control units. Management PM150 power meter Circuit breaker or other power actuator 1 ModBus / JBus CLS150 indication and local-control module Digipact internal bus DC150 data concentrator Multi 9 control device and ATB 1S interface UA150 automatic source-changeover controller RHU residualcurrent relay with separate toroid RMH earthleakage monitor Digipact installation-management system... and protection of the environment Schneider Electric fully takes into account environmental requirements, starting right from the design stage of products through to the end of their service life: The materials used for Compact NS are not dangerous for the environment The production facilities are non-polluting in compliance with the ISO standard Filtered breaking for the high ratings eliminates pollution in the switchboard The energy dissipated per pole is low, making energy losses insignificant The materials are marked to facilitate sorting for recycling at the end of product service life. 13
13 14
14 Compact NS Functions and characteristics Selection of a Compact NS circuit breaker depends on the application requiring protection (distribution systems, motor feeders, etc.) and on the prescribed installation conditions (see section Installation, connection and accessories ). Presentation 8 General characteristics 16 Protection of distribution systems Overview of solutions 18 Compact NS circuit breakers up to 630 A 0 Compact NS circuit breakers from 630 up to 300 A TM and STR trip units for Compact NS100 to 50 4 MP and STR trip units for Compact NS400 to Micrologic control units for Compact NS630b to Special cases: Single-phase and two-phase systems V systems Hz applications 40 Circuit breaker selection for DC applications 4 Motor protection Overview of solutions 44 Compact NS80H-MA 46 NS100 to 630 circuit breakers with MA magnetic trip units 47 NS100 to 50 circuit breakers with STRME electronic trip unit 48 NS400 to 630 circuit breakers with STR43ME electronic trip unit 50 Protection of industrial control panels Overview of solutions 5 Circuit breaker NSC100N 53 Trip units, auxiliaries, installation enclosures 54 UL508 / CSA - no. 14 marking 55 Earth-leakage protection Overview of solutions 56 Add-on Vigi module (Vigicompact) for Compact NS100 to Control and isolation Overview of solutions 58 Compact NSC100 and NS100 to 630NA switch-disconnectors 60 Compact NS630bNA to 1600NA switch-disconnectors 6 Compact NS1600b to 300NA switch-disconnectors 64 Source-changeover systems Presentation 66 Manual source-changeover systems 67 Remote-operated systems 68 Controllers 69 Communication COM option in Compact 70 Compact in a communication network 74 Installation, connection and accessories Compact NS80H-MA, NSC100N 78 Compact NS100 to 630 (fixed version) 84 Compact NS100 to 630 (plug-in and withdrawable version) 85 Compact NS630b to 1600 (fixed version) 104 Compact NS630b to 1600 (withdrawable version) 105 Compact NS1600b to 300 (fixed version) 14 Test equipment 19 Installation recommendations 131 Dimensions 155 Connection 193 Electrical diagrams 09 Additional characteristics 37 Catalogue numbers 51 More information about Schneider Electric 9 15
15 Functions and characteristics General characteristics MERLIN GERIN compact NS160 H Ui 750V. Uimp 8kV. Ue Icu (V) (ka) 0/ / / / Ics = 100% Icu cat A IEC 947. UTE VDE BS CEI UNE NEMA Standardised characteristics indicated on the rating plate: Ui: rated insulation voltage Uimp: rated impulse withstand voltage Icu: ultimate breaking capacity, for various values of the rated operational voltage Ue cat: utilisation category Icw: rated short-time withstand current Ics: service breaking capacity suitable for isolation Compliance with standards Compact NS circuit breakers and auxiliaries comply with the following: International recommendations: IEC general rules IEC circuit breakers IEC switches, disconnectors, switch-disconnectors, etc. IEC contactors and motor starters IEC and following - control circuit devices and switching elements; automatic control components European (EN and EN ) and the corresponding national standards: France NF Germany VDE U.K. BS Australia AS Italy CEI the specifications of the marine classification companies (Veritas, Lloyd s Register of Shipping, Det Norske Veritas, etc.) French standard NF C and the recommendations issued by the CNOMO organisation for the protection of machine tools. For U.S. UL, Canadian CSA, Mexican NOM and Japanese JIS standards, please consult us. Pollution degree Compact NS circuit breakers are certified for operation in pollution-degree III environments as defined by IEC standard (industrial environments). Tropicalisation Compact NS circuit breakers have successfully passed the tests prescribed by the following standards for extreme atmospheric conditions: IEC dry cold (-55 C) IEC dry heat (+85 C) IEC damp heat (95% relative humidity at 55 C) IEC salt mist (severity level ). Environmental protection Compact NS circuit breakers take into account important concerns for environmental protection. Most components are recyclable and the parts of Compact NS630b to NS300 circuit breakers are marked as specified in applicable standards. Ambient temperature Compact NS circuit breakers may be used between -5 C and +70 C. For temperatures higher than 40 C (65 C for circuit breakers used to protect motor feeders), devices must be derated as indicated in the documentation. Circuit-breakers should be put into service under normal ambient operating temperature conditions. Exceptionally, the circuit breaker may be put into service when the ambient temperature is between -35 C and -5 C. The permissible storage-temperature range for Compact NS circuit breakers in the original packing is -50 C (1) to +85 C. Discrimination As standard, the Compact NS range ensures discrimination between two circuit breakers positioned in series in an installation. CB1 CB (1) -40 C for Micrologic control units with an LCD screen. 16
16 Positive contact indication All Compact NS circuit breakers are suitable for isolation as defined in IEC standard : The isolation position corresponds to the O (OFF) position The operating handle cannot indicate the OFF position unless the contacts are effectively open Padlocks may not be installed unless the contacts are open. Installation of a rotary handle or a motor mechanism does not alter the reliability of the position-indication system. The isolation function is certified by tests guaranteeing: The mechanical reliability of the position indication system The absence of leakage currents Overvoltage withstand capacity between upstream and downstream connections. Installation in class II switchboards All Compact NS circuit breakers are class II front face devices. They may be installed through the door of class II switchboards (as per IEC standard 60664), without downgrading switchboard insulation. Installation requires no special operations, even when the circuit breaker is equipped with a rotary handle or a motor mechanism. Degree of protection As per standards IEC 6059 (IP degree of protection) and EN 5010 (IK degree of protection against external mechanical impacts). Bare circuit breaker with terminal shields With toggle IP40 IK07 With direct rotary handle IP40 IK07 standard / VDE Circuit breaker installed in a switchboard With toggle IP40 IK07 With direct rotary handle IP40 IK07 standard / VDE MCC IP435 CNOMO IP547 With extended rotary handle IP55 IK08 With motor mechanism IP40 IK07 17
17 Functions and characteristics Protection of distribution systems Overview of solutions Protection of distribution systems means protection of: c Systems supplied by a transformer c Systems supplied by an engine generator set c Long cables in IT and TN systems. G Power distribution Selection of circuit breakers up to 630 A Page 0 Rated current (A) Compact NS100 NS160 NS50 NS400 NS630 Breaking capacity N (ka rms) H /415 V L Accompanying trip units up to 630 A Page 4 Interchangeable thermal-magnetic and electronic trip units for NS100 to Selection of circuit breakers from 630 to 300 A Page Rated current (A) Compact NS630b NS800 NS1000 NS150 NS1600 Special case of DC systems: TM thermal-magnetic trip units for Compact NS100 to 50 and MP magnetic trip units for Compact NS400 and 630 may be used to protect DC distribution systems. Breaking capacity N (ka rms) H /415 V L Rated current (A) Compact NS1600bNS000 NS500 NS300 Breaking capacity N (ka rms) H /415 V Accompanying control units up to 300 A Page 30 Micrologic electronic control units may be used on all Compact NS630b to 300 circuit breakers and can be changed on site. 18
18 Power distribution (cont.) Single-phase or two-phase distribution Page 36 Rated current (A) Compact NS100 1P/P NS160 1P/P NS50 1P Built-in thermal-magnetic trip units Breaking capacity 1P P 1P P 1P (ka rms) 0 V N H V distribution Page 38 Rated current (A) Compact NS V Breaking capacity: 10 ka rms at 1000 V STR3SP electronic trip unit specially designed for 1000 V applications 19
19 Functions and characteristics Protection of distribution systems Compact NS circuit breakers up to 630 A Compact NS50H Compact NS630L (1) P in 3P case for type N only () specific trip units are available for operational voltages > 55 V (3) operational voltage i 500 V. Compact circuit breakers Number of poles Control manual toggle direct or extended rotary handle electric Connections fixed front connection plug-in (on base) withdrawable (on chassis) rear connection front connection rear connection front connection rear connection Electrical characteristics as per IEC and EN Rated current (A) In 40 C 65 C Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui Rated impulse withstand voltage kv) Uimp Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz DC Type of circuit breaker Ultimate breaking capacity (ka rms) lcu AC 0/40 V 50/60 Hz 380/415 V 440 V 500 V 55 V 660/690 V DC 50 V (1P) 500 V (P in series) Service breaking capacity lcs % Icu Suitability for isolation Utilisation category Endurance (cycles F/0) Electrical characteristics as per NEMA AB1 Breaking capacity (ka) Electrical characteristics as per UL508 Breaking capacity (ka) mechanical electrical 440 V In/ In 40 V 480 V 600 V 40 V 480 V 600 V Protection Trip units Overload protection long time Ir (In x ) Short-circuit protection short time lsd (Ir x ) instantaneous Ii (In x ) Earth-fault protection lg (In x ) Zone selective interlocking ZSI Add-on earth-leakage protection add-on Vigi module combination with Vigirex relay Current measurements Additional measurement, indication and control auxiliaries Indication contacts M shunt and MN undervoltage releases Voltage-presence indicator Current-transformer module and ammeter module Insulation-monitoring module Remote communication by bus Device-status indication Device remote operation Transmission of settings Indication and identification of protection devices and alarms Transmission of measured current values Installation Accessories terminal extensions and spreaders terminal shields and interphase barriers escutcheons Dimensions (mm) W x H x D fixed, front connections -3P / 4P Weight (kg) fixed, front connections 3P / 4P Source changeover system (see section on source changeover systems) 0
20 NS100 NS160 NS50 NS400 NS630 (1), 3, 4 (1), 3, 4 (1), 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c N H L N H L N H L N H L N H L () 0 () 75 () 10 () 0 () 35 () % 100% 100% 100% 100% (3) c c c c c A A A A A N H L N H L N H L N H L N H L N H L N H L N H L N H L N H L TM (thermal-magnetic) STR (electronic) STR3 (electronic) STR53 (electronic) c c c c - c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c 105 x 161 x 86 / 140 x 161 x x 55 x 110 / 185 x 55 x to 1.9 /.1 to / 7.8 1
21 Functions and characteristics Protection of distribution systems Compact NS circuit breakers from 630 up to 300 A Compact NS800H Compact NS000H (1) 65 C with vertical connections. See the temperature derating tables for other types of connections. Compact circuit breakers Number of poles Control manual toggle direct or extended rotary handle electric Type of circuit breaker Connections fixed front connection withdrawable (on chassis) rear connection front connection rear connection Electrical characteristics as per IEC and EN Rated current (A) In 50 C 65 C (1) Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui Rated impulse withstand voltage (kv) Uimp Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz DC Type of circuit breaker Ultimate breaking capacity (ka rms) lcu AC 0/40 V 50/60 Hz 380/415 V 440 V 500/55 V 660/690 V DC 50 V 500 V Service breaking capacity (ka rms) lcs Value or % Icu Short-time withstand current (ka rms) lcw 0.5 s V AC 50/60 Hz 1 s Suitability for isolation Utilisation category Endurance (C-O cycles) Pollution degree Electrical characteristics as per Nema AB1 Breaking capacity at 60 Hz (ka) mechanical electrical 440 V In/ In 690 V In/ In Protection and measurements Interchangeable control units Overload protection long time Ir (In x ) Short-circuit protection short time Isd (Ir x ) instantaneous Ii (In x ) Earth-fault protection lg (In x ) Residual earth-leakage protection I n Zone selective interlocking ZSI Protection of the fourth pole Current measurements Additional indication and control auxiliaries Indication contacts Voltage releases Remote communication by bus Device-status indication Device remote operation Transmission of settings Indication and identification of protection devices and alarms Transmission of measured current values Installation Accessories Dimensions fixed devices, front connections (mm) H x W x D Weight fixed devices, front connections (kg) M shunt release MN undervoltage release 40 V 480 V 600 V terminal extensions and spreaders terminal shields and interphase barriers escutcheons 3P 4P 3P 4P Source changeover system (see section on source changeover systems) Manual, remote-operated and automatic source changeover systems
22 NS630b NS800 NS1000 NS150 NS1600 NS1600b NS000 NS500 NS300 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 c c c c c - c c - N H L N H N H c c c c c c c c c c c c - - c c c c c - - c c c c c N H L N H N H % 50% 100% 75% 50% 65 ka 75% c c c B B A B B B B III III III N H L N H N H Micrologic.0 Micrologic 5.0 Micrologic.0 A Micrologic 5.0 A Micrologic 6.0 A Micrologic 7.0 A c c c c c c - c - c c c c c c c c c c c - - c c c c c c c c c c - - c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c - - c c c c - - c c c c c - c - c c 37 x 10 x x 40 x x 80 x x 535 x c 3
23 Functions and characteristics Protection of distribution systems TM and STR trip units for Compact NS100 to 50 Compact NS100 to 50 circuit breakers, types N, H and L, may be equipped with either a TM thermal-magnetic trip unit or an STR electronic trip unit. A mechanical mismatch-protection system avoids breaker and trip unit mismatches TM-D TM-G TM-D TM-G STRSE STRGE Standard protection Protection of systems supplied by generators. Protection of long cables Protection of DC distribution systems t 1 TM thermal-magnetic trip units 1 0 Ir Im 1 overload protection threshold short-circuit protection pick-up I Ir x 50A Protection The protection functions may be set using the adjustment dials. Overload protection Thermal protection with an adjustable threshold. Im x 50A Short-circuit protection Magnetic protection with a fixed or adjustable pick-up, depending on the rating. Protection of the fourth pole On four-pole circuit breakers, the trip units can be of the, 4P 3d type (neutral unprotected), 4P 3d + N/ type (neutral protection at 0.5 In) or 4P 4d type (neutral protection at In). 6 Ir Im TM 50 D 50A / 40 C TM thermal-magnetic trip units TM16D to 50D TM16G to 63G Ratings (A) In at 40 C Compact NS100 c c c c c c c c c c c c Compact NS160 c c c c c c c c c c - - c c c c Compact NS50 c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c Overload protection (thermal) Current setting (A) Ir adjustable from 0.8 to 1 x In adjustable from 0.8 to 1 x In Short-circuit protection (magnetic) Current setting (A) Im fixed adjustable fixed Compact NS Compact NS160/ to 10 x In Protection of the fourth pole Neutral unprotected 4P 3d no protection no protection Neutral protection at 0.5 In 4P 3d + N/ x Ir Neutral protection at In 4P 4d 1 x Ir 1 x Ir 4
24 t 1 STR electronic trip units Ir Im long-time threshold (overload protection) long-time tripping delay 3 short-time pick-up (short-circuit protection) 4 short-time tripping delay 5 instantaneous pick-up (short-circuit protection) 6 test connector 7 percent load indication I In=100A Ir Im Io x In STR SE Ir Protection The protection functions may be set using the adjustment dials. Overload protection True rms long-time protection with an adjustable threshold. x Io.98 1 %Ir Im Short-circuit protection Short-time and instantaneous protection: c Short-time protection with an adjustable pick-up and fixed tripping delay; c Instantaneous protection with fixed pick-up. Protection of the fourth pole On four-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection is set using a three-position switch to 4P 3d (neutral unprotected), 4P 3d + N/ (neutral protection at 0.5 In) or 4P 4d (neutral protection at In). alarm 3 x Ir test - Protection of the fourth pole Indications A LED on the front indicates the percent load: c ON - load is > 90% of Ir setting c Flashing - load is > 105% of Ir setting. Test A mini test kit or a portable test kit may be connected to the test connector on the front to check circuit-breaker operation after installing the trip unit or accessories. STR electronic trip units STRSE STRGE Ratings (A) In 0 to 70 C (*) (*) (*) Circuit breaker Compact NS100 N/H/L c - c - - n n - - Compact NS160 N/H/L c c c c - n n n - Compact NS50 N/H/L c c c c c n n n n Overload protection (Long Time) Current setting Ir = In x settings 48 settings Time delay (s) at 1.5 x Ir (min. max.) at 6 x Ir at 7. x Ir Short-circuit protection (Short Time) Pick-up (A) Im = Ir x Accuracy ± 15 % 8 settings 8 settings Time delay (ms) fixed fixed max. resettable time i 40 i 40 max. break time i 60 i 60 Short-circuit protection (Instantaneous) Pick-up (A) Ii fixed u 11 x In fixed u 11 x In Protection of the fourth pole Neutral unprotected 4P 3d no protection - Neutral protection at 0.5 In 4P 3d + N/ 0.5 x Ir - Neutral protection at In 4P 4d 1 x Ir - (*) If the STRSE and STRGE 50 A trip units are used in high-temperature environments, the setting must take into account the thermal limitations of the circuit breaker. The overload protection setting may not exceed 0.95 at 60 C or 0.9 at 70 C. Setting example What is the overload-protection threshold of a Compact NS50 circuit breaker equipped with an STRSE 160 A trip unit set to Io = 0.5 and Ir = 0.8? Answer: In x Io x Ir = 160 x 0.5 x 0.8 = 64 A. Io Ir x In.8 x Io 1 5
25 Functions and characteristics Protection of distribution systems MP and STR trip units for Compact NS400 to 630 Compact NS400 to 630 circuit breakers, types N, H and L, 3-pole and 4-pole, may be equipped with any of the STR3SE, STR3SV, STR53UE and STR53SV electronic trip units. The STR53UE and STR53SV trip units offer a wider range of settings and the STR53UE offers a number of optional protection, measurement and communications functions. For DC applications, the Compact NS400H and 630H circuit breakers are equipped with a built-in MP magnetic trip unit STR3SE / STR53UE STR3SE / STR53UE STR3SV / STR53SV MP Standard protection with selectivity Protection of DC distribution systems Protection of systems supplied by generators. Protection of long cables Protection of systems U > 55 V Selection of the trip unit depends on the type of distribution system protected and the operational voltage of the circuit breaker. Protection for all types of circuits, from 60 to 630 A, is possible with only four trip-unit catalogue numbers, whatever the circuit-breaker operational voltage: c U i 55 V: STR3SE or STR53UE c U > 55 V: STR3SV or STR53SV. Trip units do not have a predefined rating. The tripping threshold depends on the circuit breaker rating and the LT (long time) current setting. For example, for an STR3SE trip unit set to the maximum value, the tripping threshold is: c 50 A, when installed on a Compact NS A c 630 A, when installed on a Compact NS630. STR3SE (U < 55 V) and STR3SV (U > 55 V) electronic trip units t Ir Im 5 I test + - Io x In STR 3 SE Ir x Io alarm %Ir Isd 5 6 x Ir Ir Isd 1 long-time threshold (overload protection) long-time tripping delay 3 short-time pick-up (short-circuit protection) 4 short-time tripping delay 5 instantaneous pick-up (short-circuit protection) 6 test connector 7 percent load indication Protection The protection functions may be set using the adjustment dials. Overload protection Long-time protection with an adjustable threshold and fixed tripping delay: c Io base setting (6-position dial from 0.5 to 1) c Ir fine adjustment (8-position dial from 0.8 to 1). Short-circuit protection Short-time and instantaneous protection: c Short-time protection with an adjustable pick-up and fixed tripping delay c Instantaneous protection with fixed pick-up. Protection of the fourth pole On four-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection is set using a three-position switch to 4P 3d (neutral unprotected), 4P 3d + N/ (neutral protection at 0.5 In) or 4P 4d (neutral protection at In). Indications A LED on the front indicates the percent load: c ON - load is > 90% of Ir setting c Flashing - load is > 105% of Ir setting. Test A mini test kit or a portable test kit may be connected to the test connector on the front to check circuit-breaker operation after installing the trip unit or accessories. 6
26 t Ir Isd Ii I 5 1 long-time threshold (overload protection) long-time tripping delay 3 short-time pick-up (short-circuit protection) 4 short-time tripping delay 5 instantaneous pick-up (short-circuit protection) 6 optional earth-fault pick-up 7 optional earth-fault tripping delay 8 test connector 9 battery and lamp test pushbutton Earth-fault protection (T) (see the Options for the STR53UE electronic trip unit section on the following pages). With the earth-fault option (T) on the STR53UE electronic trip unit, an external neutral sensor can be installed. Available ratings of external neutral sensors: 150, 50, 400, 630 A. STR53UE (U < 55 V) and STR53SV (U > 55 V) electronic trip units (*) 9 7 (*) Io.6 test x In Ir tr x Io Ir STR 53 UE Isd tsd (s) x Ir on I t off %Ir >Ir >Isd >Ig Ii tsd > Ih In I1 I I3 Ir Isd li Protection The protection functions may be set using the adjustment dials x In Ig Overload protection Long-time protection with adjustable threshold and tripping delay: c Io base setting (6-position dial from 0.5 to 1) c Ir fine adjustment (8-position dial from 0.8 to 1). Short-circuit protection Short-time and instantaneous protection: c Short-time protection with adjustable pick-up and tripping delay, with or without constant I t c Instantaneous protection with adjustable pick-up. Protection of the fourth pole On four-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection is set using a three-position switch to 4P 3d (neutral unprotected), 4P 3d + N/ (neutral protection at 0.5 In) or 4P 4d (neutral protection at In) tg (s) x In on I t off.8 test µ P > Ir > Im fault A tr Overload LED (% Ir) A LED on the front indicates the percent load: c When ON, the load is > 90% of Ir setting c When flashing, the load is > 105% of Ir setting. Fault indications A LED signals the type of fault: c Overload (long-time protection) or abnormal internal temperature (Ir) c Short-circuit (short-time protection) or instantaneous (Isd) c Earth fault (if earth-fault protection option installed) (Ig) c Microprocessor malfunction: c Both (Ig) and (Isd) LEDs ON c (Ig) LED ON (if earth-fault protection option (T) installed). Battery powered. Spare batteries are supplied in an adapter box. The LED indicating the type of fault goes OFF after approximately ten minutes to conserve battery power. The information is however stored in memory and the LED can be turned back ON by pressing the battery/led test pushbutton. The LED automatically goes OFF and the memory is cleared when the circuit breaker is reset. Test A mini test kit or a portable test kit may be connected to the test connector on the front to check circuit-breaker operation after installing the trip unit or accessories. The test pushbutton tests the battery and the (% Ir), (Ir), (Isd) and (Ig) LEDs. Self monitoring The circuit breaker trips if a microprocessor fault or an abnormal temperature is detected. Options Four options are available: c Earth-fault protection T c Ammeter I c Zone selective interlocking ZSI c Communications option COM. 7
27 Functions and characteristics Protection of distribution systems MP and STR trip units for Compact NS400 to 630 (cont.) Trip units STR3SE (U i 55V) STR53UE (U i 55V) STR3SV (U > 55V) STR53SV (U > 55V) Ratings (A) In 0 to 70 C (1) Circuit breaker Compact NS400 N/H/L c c c - c c c - Compact NS630 N/H/L c c Overload protection (Long time) Current setting Ir = In x adjustable, 48 settings adjustable, 48 settings Time delay (s) fixed adjustable (min. max.) at 1.5 x Ir at 6 x Ir at 7. Ir Short-circuit protection (Short time) Pick-up (A) Isd = Ir x accuracy ± 15 % adjustable, 8 settings adjustable, 8 settings Time delay (ms) fixed adjustable, 4 settings + "constant I t" option max. resettable time < 40 < 15 < 60 < 140 < 30 max. break time < 60 < 60 < 140 < 30 < 350 Short-circuit protection (instantaneous) Pick-up (A) Ii = In x fixed adjustable, 8 settings Protection of the fourth pole Neutral unprotected 4P 3d no protection no protection Neutral protection at 0.5 In 4P 3d + N/ 0.5 x Ir 0.5 x Ir Neutral protection at In 4P 4d 1 x Ir 1 x Ir Options Indication of fault type - c (standard) Zone selective interlocking ZSI - c () Communications COM - c () Built-in ammeter I - c () Earth-fault protection T - c () (1) If the trip units are used in high-temperature environments, the setting must take into account the thermal limitations of the circuit breaker. The overload protection setting may not exceed 0.95 at 60 C or 0.9 at 70 C for the Compact NS400, and 0.95 at 50 C, 0.9 at 60 C or 0.85 at 70 C for the Compact NS630. () This option is not available for the STR53SV trip unit. Setting example What is the overload-protection threshold of a Compact NS400 circuit breaker equipped with an STR3SE (or STR3SV) trip unit set to Io = 0.5 and Ir = 0.8? Answer. In x Io x Ir = 400 x 0.5 x 0.8 = 160 A. The identical trip unit, with identical settings but installed on a Compact NS630 circuit breaker, will have an overload-protection threshold of: 630 x 0.5 x 0.8 = 50 A. Io Ir x In.8 x Io 1 8
28 Possible combinations: c I c T c I + T c I + COM c I + T + COM c ZSI c ZSI + I c ZSI + T c ZSI + I + T c ZSI +I + COM c ZSI + I + T + COM Options for the STR53UE electronic trip unit Earth-fault protection (T) Type Residual Pick-up Ig = In x 0. to 1 Accuracy ± 15% adjustable, 8 settings Time delay adjustable, 4 settings constant I t function max. resettable time max. break time < 140< 30 < 350 < 500 Ammeter (I) A digital display continuously indicates the current of the phase with the greatest load. The value of each current (I1, I, I3, Ineutral) may be successively displayed by pressing a scroll button. LEDs indicate the phase for which the current is displayed. Ammeter display limits: c Minimum current > 0. x In. Lower currents are not displayed c Maximum current < 10 x In. Zone selective interlocking (ZSI) A number of circuit breakers are interconnected one after another by a pilot wire. In the event of a short-time or earth fault: c If a given STR53UE trip unit detects the fault, it informs the upstream circuit breaker, which applies the set time delay c If the STR53UE trip unit does not detect the fault, the upstream circuit breaker trips after its shortest time delay. In this manner, the fault is cleared rapidly by the nearest circuit breaker. The thermal stresses on the circuits are minimised and time discrimination is maintained throughout the installation. The STR53UE trip unit can handle only the downstream end of a zone selective interlocking function. Consequently, the ZSI option cannot be implemented between two Compact NS circuit breakers. Opto-electronic outputs Using opto-transistors, these outputs ensure total isolation between the internal circuits of the trip unit and the circuits wired by the user. Communications option (COM) This option transmits data to Digipact distribution monitoring and control modules. Transmitted data: c Settings c Phase and neutral currents (rms values) c Highest current of the three phases c Overload-condition alarm c Cause of tripping (overload, short-circuit, etc.). MP DC trip units Im(A) In Im Magnetic trip units for Compact NS400/630 three-pole, type H circuit breakers. These trip units are specifically designed to protect DC distribution systems. They are not interchangeable. The circuit breaker and trip unit are supplied fully assembled. Built-in trip units MP1 MP MP3 Circuit breaker Compact NS400H c c - Compact NS630H c c c Short-circuit protection (magnetic) Pick-up (A) Im adjustable adjustable adjustable
29 Functions and characteristics Protection of distribution systems Micrologic control units for Compact NS630b to 300 Micrologic.0 and 5.0 control units for protection of power circuits. Micrologic 5.0 provides in addition, time discrimination for short circuits. Micrologic 5.0 Protection Protection thresholds and delays are set using the adjustment dials. Setting accuracy may be enhanced by limiting the setting range using a different long-time rating plug. Overload protection True rms long-time protection. Thermal memory: thermal image before and after tripping. Short-circuit protection Short-time (rms) and instantaneous protection. Selection of I t type (ON or OFF) for short-time delay. Neutral protection On three-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection is not possible. On four-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection may be set using a three-position switch: neutral unprotected (4P 3d), neutral protection at 0.5 In (4P 3d + N/) or neutral protection at In (4P 4d). Indications Overload indication by alarm LED on the front; the LED goes on when the current exceeds the long-time trip threshold. Test A mini test kit or a portable test kit may be connected to the test connector on the front to check circuit-breaker operation after installing the trip unit or accessories. 1 long time Ir x In tr (s) Ir 4 alarm 5 3 short time Isd x Ir setting tsd (s) on I 0 t off delay instantaneous I i off x In test long-time threshold and tripping delay overload alarm (LED) 3 short-time pick-up and tripping delay 4 instantaneous pick-up 5 fixing screw for long-time rating plug 6 test connector Note. Micrologic control units that do not include measurement functions are equipped with a transparent lead-seal cover as standard. 30
30 Protection Micrologic.0 Long time Current setting (A) Ir = In x Tripping between 1.05 and 1.0 Ir other ranges or disable by changing rating plug Time delay (s) accuracy 0 to -30% tr at 1.5 x Ir accuracy 0 to -0% tr at 6 x Ir accuracy 0 to -0% tr at 7. x Ir Thermal memory 0 minutes before and after tripping Instantaneous Pick-up (A) Isd = Ir x accuracy ± 10% Time delay fixed: 0 ms Protection Micrologic 5.0 Long time Current setting (A) Ir = In x Tripping between 1.05 and 1.0 Ir other ranges or disable by changing rating plug Time delay (s) accuracy 0 to -30% tr at 1.5 x Ir accuracy 0 to -0% tr at 6 x Ir accuracy 0 to -0% tr at 7. x Ir Thermal memory 0 minutes before and after tripping Short time Pick-up (A) Isd = Ir x accuracy ± 10% Time delay (ms) at 10 x Ir settings I t Off I t On tsd (max resettable time) tsd (max break time) Instantaneous Pick-up (A) Ii = In x off accuracy ± 10% t Ir tr Isd 0 I 31
31 Functions and characteristics Protection of distribution systems Micrologic A control units for Compact NS630b to 300 (cont.) Micrologic A control units protect power circuits. They also offer measurements, display, communication and current maximeters. Version 6 provides earth-fault protection, version 7 provides earthleakage protection. 10 Micrologic 6.0 A t= I n= tsd= tr= Isd= Ii= Ir= Ig= tg= 100 % 40 % menu MA ka s Protection Protection thresholds and delays are set using the adjustment dials. The selected values are momentarily displayed on the screen, in amperes and in seconds. Setting accuracy may be enhanced by limiting the setting range using a different long-time rating plug. Overload protection True rms long-time protection. Thermal memory: thermal image before and after tripping. Short-circuit protection Short-time (rms) and instantaneous protection. Selection of I t type (ON or OFF) for short-time delay. Earth-fault protection Residual or source ground return earth fault protection. Selection of I t type (ON or OFF) for delay. Residual earth-leakage protection (Vigi). Operation without an external power supply. c Protected against nuisance tripping. c DC-component withstand class A up to 10 A. Neutral protection On three-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection is not possible. On four-pole circuit breakers, neutral protection may be set using a three-position switch: neutral unprotected (4P 3d), neutral protection at 0.5 In (4P 3d + N/), neutral protection at In (4P 4d). Zone selective interlocking (ZSI) A ZSI terminal block may be used to interconnect a number of control units to provide total discrimination for short-time and earth-fault protection, without a delay before tripping. Overload alarm A red alarm LED goes on when the current exceeds the long-time trip threshold long time Ir x In short time Isd x Ir Ig D E F C B A setting G H J ground fault tr (s) Ir 4 tsd (s) on I 0 t off delay tg (s) on I 0 t off alarm instantaneous I i off x In test "Ammeter" measurements Micrologic A control units measure the true (rms) value of currents. A digital LCD screen continuously displays the most heavily loaded phase (Imax) or displays the I1, I, I3, IN, Ig,I n, stored-current (maximeter) and setting values by successively pressing the navigation button. The load on each phase is indicated continuously by bargraphs. The optional external power supply makes it possible to display currents < 0% In. Communication option In conjunction with the COM communication option, the control unit transmits the following: c Settings c All ammeter measurements c Tripping causes c Maximeter readings. 1 long-time threshold and tripping delay overload alarm (LED) 3 short-time pick-up and tripping delay 4 instantaneous pick-up 5 earth-leakage or earth-fault pick-up and tripping delay 6 earth-leakage or earth-fault test button 7 long-time rating plug screw 8 test connector 9 lamp test, reset and battery test 10 indication of tripping cause 11 digital display 1 three-phase bargraph and ammeter 13 navigation buttons Fault indications LEDs indicate the type of fault: c Overload (long-time protection) or abnormal internal temperature (Ir) c Short-circuit (short-time protection) or instantaneous (Isd) c Earth fault or earth leakage (Ig or I n) c M icroprocessor malfunction (Ap). Battery power The fault indication LEDs remain on until the test/reset button is pressed. Under normal operating conditions, the battery supplying the LEDs has a service life of approximately 10 years. Note. Micrologic A control units come with a transparent lead-seal cover as standard. Test A mini test kit or a portable test kit may be connected to the test connector on the front to check circuit-breaker operation. For Micrologic 6.0 A and 7.0 A control units, the operation of earth-fault or earth-leakage protection can be checked by pressing the test button located above the test connector. 3
32 Protection Micrologic.0 A long time current setting (A) Ir = In x tripping between 1.05 and 1.0 x Ir other ranges or disable by changing rating plug time delay (s) accuracy 0 to -30% tr at 1.5 x Ir accuracy 0 to -0 % tr at 6 x Ir accuracy 0 to -0 % tr at 7. x Ir thermal memory 0 minutes before and after tripping instantaneous pick-up (A) Isd = Ir x accuracy: ±10 % time delay fixed: 0 ms Ammeter Micrologic.0 A continuous current measurements measurements from 0 to 00 % of In I1 I I3 IN accuracy: 1.5% (including sensors) no auxiliary source (where I > 0 % In) maximeters I1 max I max I3 max IN max Protection Micrologic 5.0 / 6.0 / 7.0 A long time Micrologic 5.0 / 6.0 / 7.0 A current setting (A) Ir = In x tripping between 1.05 and 1.0 x Ir other ranges or disable by changing rating plug time delay (s) accuracy 0 to -30 % tr at 1.5 x Ir accuracy 0 to -0 % tr at 6 x Ir accuracy 0 to -0 % tr at 7. x Ir thermal memory 0 minutes before and after tripping short time pick-up (A) Isd = Ir x accuracy: ±10 % time delay (ms) at 10 Ir settings I t Off I t On tsd (max resettable time) tsd (max break time) instantaneous pick-up (A) Ii = In x off accuracy: ±10 % earth fault Micrologic 6.0 A pick up (A) Ig = In x A B C D E F G H J accuracy: ±10 % In i 400 A A < In i 100 A In > 100 A time delay (ms) settings I t Off at In or 100 A I t On tg (max resettable time) tg (max break time) residual earth leakage (Vigi) Micrologic 7.0 A sensitivity (A) I n accuracy: 0 to -0 % time delay (ms.) settings t n (max resettable time) t n (max break time) Ammeter Micrologic 5.0 / 6.0 / 7.0 A continuous current measurements measurements from 0 to 00 % of In I1 I I3 IN Ig I n accuracy: 1.5 % (including sensors) no auxiliary source (where I > 0 % In) maximeters I1 max I max I3 max IN max Ig max I n max t Ir tr Isd 0 I t Ir menu tr Isd tsd Ii 0 I t I t on Ig I t off tg 0 I t I n t n 0 I menu Note. All current-based protection functions require no auxiliary source. The test / reset button resets maximeters, clears the tripping indication and tests the battery. 33
33 Functions and characteristics Protection of distribution systems Micrologic A control units for Compact NS630b to 300 (cont.) External sensor (CT) External sensor for source ground return protection Accessories for Micrologic control units External sensors External sensor for earth-fault protection The sensor is used with 3P circuit breakers and the Micrologic 6.0 A control unit. It is installed on the neutral conductor for residual type earth-fault protection. The rating of the sensor (CT) must be compatible with the rating of the circuit breaker: c NS630b to NS /1600 CT c NS1600b to NS /000 CT c NS000 to NS /300 CT. Rectangular sensor for earth-leakage protection The sensor is installed around the busbars (phases + neutral) to detect the zero-phase sequence current required for the earth-leakage protection with Micrologic 7.0 A control unit. Rectangular sensors are available in two sizes. Inside dimensions (mm) c 80 x 115 up to 1600 A c 470 x 160 up to 300 A. External sensor for source ground return protection The sensor is installed around the connection of the transformer neutral point to earth and connects to the Micrologic 6.0 control unit to provide the source ground return (SGR) protection. External voltage measurement inputs External voltage measurement inputs are used to supply power for earth leakage protection. As standard, the Micrologic 7.0 control unit is supplied by internal voltage measurement inputs placed downstream of the pole for voltages between 100 and 690 V AC. On request, external voltage measurement inputs may be ordered for circuit breakers fed from the load side or for voltages exceeding 690 V. Long-time rating plug Four interchangeable plugs may be used to limit the long-time threshold setting range for higher accuracy. As standard, control units are equipped with the 0.4 to 1 plug. Setting ranges Standard Ir = In x Low-setting option Ir = In x High-setting option Ir = In x Off plug no long-time protection External power-supply module Used in conjunction with the Micrologic A control units, this module maintains three functions when the circuit breaker is OFF or the current is less than 0% In: c Display of measurements c Screen backlighting c Operation of maximeters. Characteristics: c Power supply: c 110/130, 00/40, 380/415 V AC (+ 10% - 15%), consumption 10 VA c 4/30, 48/60, 100/15 V DC (+0% -0%), consumption 10 W c Output voltage: 4 V DC; power delivered: 5 W / 5 VA c Ripple < 5% c Class isolation. 34
34 Lead-seal cover for Micrologic A Spare parts for Micrologic control units Lead-seal cover for Micrologic A A transparent, lead-seal cover controls access to the adjustment dials. When the cover is closed, it is still possible to access: c The test connector c The test button for the earth-fault and earth-leakage protection function. Spare battery A battery supplies power to the LEDs identifying the tripping causes. Battery service life is approximately ten years. A test button on the front of the control unit is used to check the battery condition. The battery may be replaced on site when discharged. 35
35 Functions and characteristics Protection of distribution systems Single-phase and two-phase systems Compact NS160H single-pole Compact NS100N two-pole Compact circuit breakers Number of poles Control manual toggle direct or extended rotary handle electric Connections fixed front connection withdrawable rear connection front connection rear connection Electrical characteristics as per IEC and EN Rated current (A) In 40 C Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui Rated impulse withstand voltage kv) Uimp Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz DC Type of circuit breaker Ultimate breaking capacity (ka rms) lcu AC 0 V 50/60 Hz 77 V 380/415 V 440 V 500 V 55 V 660/690 V DC 50 V (1P) 500 V (P) Service breaking capacity (ka rms) lcs % Icu Suitability for isolation Utilisation category Endurance (C-O cycles) mechanical electrical 77 V In/ In Electrical characteristics as per NEMA AB1 Breaking capacity (ka) V AC 50/60 Hz 40 V 77 V 480 V 600 V Protection and measurements Type of trip units Ratings In Overload protection (thermal) long time Ir threshold Short-circuit protection (magnetic) instantaneous lm pickup Add-on earth-leakage protection add-on Vigi module combination with Vigirex relay Additional indication and control auxiliaries Indication contacts Voltages releases Remote communication by bus Device status indication via communicating auxiliary contacts Installation Accessories Dimensions (mm) Weight (kg) Source changeover system Interlocking systems M shunt release MN undervoltage release terminal extensions and spreaders terminal shields and interphase barriers escutcheons W x H x D 36
36 NS100 NS160 NS c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c N H N H N H N H N % 100% 100% 100% 100% c c c c c A A A A A N H N H N H N H N built-in thermal-magnetic built-in thermal-magnetic built-in thermal-magnetic fixed fixed fixed fixed fixed fixed c c c - c - c - - c - c - - c - c - - c - c - c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c 35 x 161 x x 161 x x 161 x x 161 x x 161 x
37 Functions and characteristics Protection of distribution systems 1000 V systems 1000 V Compact NS400 For ratings above 400A, see the Masterpact catalogue. Compact circuit breakers Number of poles Rating of sensors (A) Control manual toggle direct or extended rotary handle electric Connections fixed front connection plug-in (on base) withdrawable (on chassis) rear connection front connection rear connection front connection rear connection Electrical characteristics Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz Ultimate breaking capacity (ka rms) lcu AC 1000 V Service breaking capacity lcs % Icu Electrical characteristics as per IEC and EN Rated current (A) In 40 C Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui Rated impulse withstand voltage kv) Uimp Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz Ultimate breaking capacity (ka rms) lcu AC 1000 V Service breaking capacity lcs % Icu Suitability for isolation Short-time withstand current (ka rms) lcw 0.5 s V AC 50/60 Hz 1 s Utilisation category Endurance (C-O cycles) mechanical electrical 1000 V In/ In Pollution degree Protection and measurements Interchangeable trip units Overload protection long time Ir (In x ) Short-circuit protection short time Isd (Ir x ) instantaneous Ii (In x ) Earth-fault protection lg (In x ) Residual earth-leakage protection I n Zone selective interlocking ZSI Protection of the fourth pole Add-on earth-leakage protection combination with Vigirex relay Current measurements Additional indication and control auxiliaries Indication contacts Voltage releases Remote communication by bus Device-status indication Device remote operation Transmission of settings Indication and identification of protection devices and alarms Transmission of measured current values Installation Accessories M shunt release MN undervoltage release Dimensions (mm) fixed 3P W x H x D 4P Weight (kg) fixed 3P 4P Source changeover system Interlocking systems terminal extensions and spreaders terminal shields and interphase barriers escutcheons 38
38 NS V 3 150, 50, 400 c c c c consult us consult us consult us consult us consult us % For ratings above 400 A, see the Compact C and Masterpact catalogues 150, 50, % c standardised standardised A III STR3SP c c c - c - - c - c c c c c c c c 480 x 140 x consult us 39
39 Functions and characteristics Protection of distribution systems 400 Hz applications Tripping thresholds The 400 Hz current settings are obtained by multiplying the 50 Hz values by the following coefficient: K1 for thermal trip units; K for magnetic trip units. On adjustable trip units, these adaptation coefficients are independent of the unit adjustment knob position. Thermal trip units The current settings are lower at 400 Hz than at 50 Hz (K1 < 1). Magnetic trip units The current settings are conversely higher at 400 Hz than at 50 Hz (K > 1). Adjustable trip units should be set to minimum, or use Compact circuit breakers equipped with low magnetic trip units (type G). Electronic trip units The use of electronics offers the advantage of greater operating stability when the frequency is varied. However, the devices are still subjected to frequency related temperature effects which may sometimes pose restrictions on their use. Column K1 of the table gives the maximum permissible current to be used for the current setting (knob position). Thermal-magnetic trip units circuit breaker trip unit thermal setting K1 magnetic K at 40 C setting NS100N TM16G TM5G TM40G TM63G NS50N TM16D TM5D TM40D TM63D TM80D TM100D TM15D TM160D TM00D (*) 1.6 TM50D (*) 1.6 (*) for TM 00D and TM50D, Im must be set to its maximum Electronic trip units Compact adaptation coefficients circuit breaker trip unit rating long-time short-time K Ir at 50 Hz Ir maxi Irm at 50 Hz (A at 40 C) K1 (A) NS100N STRSE to 1 to 10 Ir 1 NS50N STRSE to 0.9 to 10 Ir 1 NS400N STR3SE to to 10 Ir 1 NS630N STR3SE to to 10 Ir 1 NS400N STR53SE to to 10 Ir 1 NS630N STR53SE to to 10 Ir 1 C801N STR5DE to to 10 Ir 0.97 STR35SE/GE to to 10 Ir 0.97 C1001N STR5DE to to 10 Ir 0.97 STR35SE/GE to to 10 Ir 0.97 C151N STR5DE to to 10 Ir 0.97 STR35SE/GE to to 10 Ir
40 Breaking capacity of Compact NS and Compact circuit breakers at 400 Hz At 440 V, 400 Hz circuit breaker NS100N NS50N NS400N NS630N C801N C1001N C151N breaking capacity 1 ka 4,5 ka 10 ka 10 ka 5 ka 5 ka 5 ka U volt 400 Hz Connection R MN/M 15 V CC MN or M auxiliary releases For Compact NS For circuit breakers on 400 Hz systems, only 15 V DC rated releases can be used. The release must be supplied by the 400 Hz system via a rectifier bridge (to be selected from the table below) and an additional resistor with characteristics depending on the system voltage and the type of circuit breaker. U (V) 400 Hz rectifier additional resistor 0/40 V Thomson 110 BHz or 4. kω-5 W General Instrument W06 or Semikron SKB at 1,/1,3 380/40 V Semikron SKB at 1,/1, kω-10 W Note : other models of rectifier bridges can be used if their characteristics are at least equivalent to those stated above. For Compact C The following auxiliary releases are designed to operate at 400 Hz. U (V) 400 Hz catalogue number MN 110/130 V 4495 MN 08/50 V 4496 MN 380/415 V 4493 M 380/415 V
41 Functions and characteristics Protection of distribution systems Circuit breaker selection for DC applications b C Selection criteria The selection of the type of circuit breaker most suitable for protection of a DC installation depends mainly on the following criteria: The rated current, which determines the rating of the equipment; The rated voltage, which determines the number of poles in series necessary for breaking; The maximum short-circuit current at the point of installation, which determines the breaking capacity; The type of network (see below). type of system earthed systems insulated systems one polarity of the DC supply is a centre point of the DC supply is earthed earthed diagrams i i i a a and various a cases of faults U/ U R + R U B U/ A B A B b C b C A R fault effect fault A max. Isc Isc close to max. Isc no effect the positive polarity the positive polarity is the only is the only one involved one involved, voltage U/ fault B max. Isc max. Isc max. Isc both polarities are involved both polarities are involved both polarities are involved fault C no effect same as fault A but this is the no effect negative polarity which is involved most unfavorable case fault A faults A and C fault B distribution of the the poles required to perform on each polarity there must be the the poles required to perform breaking poles the break are in series number of poles required to perform the break are shared between on the positive polarity the break of max. Isc at U/ the polarities Isc 40 V DC 300 A 500 Ah Ri = 0.5 m /cell Calculation the short-circuit current (Isc) across the terminals of a battery When a short-circuit occurs across its terminals, a battery discharges a current given by Ohm's law: Isc = Vb Ri where Vb = the maximum discharge voltage (battery 100 % charged). and Ri = the internal resistance equivalent to the sum of the cell resistances (figure generally given by the manufacturer according to the capacity of the battery). Example What is the short-circuit current at the terminals of a standing battery with the following characteristics: Capacity: 500 Ah; Max. discharge voltage: 40 V (110 cells of. V); Discharge current: 300 A; Autonomy: 1/ hour; Internal resistance: 0.5 mω per cell. Ri = 110 x = Isc = = 4.4kA As the above calculation shows, the short-circuit current is relatively weak. Note: If the internal resistance is not known, the following approximate formula can be used: Isc = kc, where C is the capacity of the battery expressed in Ampere-hours, and k is a coefficient close to 10 but in any case always lower than 0. 4
42 + 15 V = V = - load load NC100 H 3P 80 A NC100 H 4P 100 A Example 1 Determine the protection required for a 80 A feeder on a 15 V DC network with an earthed negative pole and an Isc of 15 ka. The table below indicates that a NC100H circuit breaker (30 ka, P, 15 V) should be used. The table opposite indicates that both circuit breaker poles should be fitted on the positive pole of the network. An additional circuit breaker pole can be fitted on the negative pole of the network for isolation purposes. Example Determine the protection required for a 100 A feeder on a 50 V DC network with an earthed middle point and an Isc of 15 ka. Each pole will be exposed to a maximum of U/ = 15 V. The table below indicates that NC100H (30 ka, P, 15 V), NS100N (50 ka, 1P, 15 V) or NS160N (50 ka, 1P, 15 V) circuit breakers should be used. The table opposite indicates that both circuit breaker poles must take part in the breaking at a voltage of 15 V V = - load NS400H P 400 A Example 3 Determine the protection required for a 400 A feeder on an unearthed 50 V DC network with an Isc of 35 ka. The table above indicates that NS400H circuit breakers (85 ka, 1P, 50 V) should be used. At least poles must take part in breaking. The table opposite indicates that the half the number of circuit breaker poles required for breaking should be fitted on the positive pole of the network and the other half on the negative pole. selection table of DC circuit breakers type rated current (A) breaking capacity (ka) (L/R i s) protection against protection against and (and number of poles required to perform the break) overloads (thermal) short-circuits (magnetic) trip units 4/48 V 15 V 50 V 500 V 750 V NS100N (1p) 50 (1p) 50 (1p) 50 (p) same as for trip units NS100H (1p) 85 (1p) 85 (1p) 85 (p) used on AC systems NS100L (1p) 100 (1p) 100 (1p) 100 (p) NS160N (1p) 50 (1p) 50 (1p) 50 (p) NS160H (1p) 85 (1p) 85 (1p) 85 (p) NS160L (1p) 100 (1p) 100 (1p) 100 (p) NS50N (1p) 50 (1p) 50 (1p) 50 (p) NS50H (1p) 85 (1p) 85 (1p) 85 (p) NS50L (1p) 100 (1p) 100 (1p) 100 (p) NS400H MP1/MP/MP3 85 (1p) 85 (1p) 85 (1p) 85 (p) no thermal protection: specially designed for DC NS630H MP1/MP/MP3 85 (1p) 85 (1p) 85 (1p) 85 (p) an external relay C151N-DC P1/P (1p) 50 (1p) 50 (p) 50 (3p) 5 (3p) must be provided 43
43 Functions and characteristics Motor protection Overview of solutions The circuit breakers presented here provide protection against short circuits and are suitable for isolation as defined by standard IEC For complete protection of the motor and its control device, overload protection may be provided by either the circuit breaker or a separate Telemecanique thermal relay. The control device may be of the direct on-line type (with or without reversing) or of the star-delta type. Combinations are governed by standard IEC Motor protection up to 37 kw Motor rating (kw) Compact NS80 Breaking H 70 capacity (ka rms) 380/415 V General circuit-breaker characteristics Page 16 The Compact NS80H-MA circuit breaker is specially designed for motor protection. Accompanying trip unit Page 46 A built-in MA magnetic trip unit provides short-circuit protection. Motor protection up to 50 kw Motor rating (kw) Compact NS100 NS160/50 NS400/630 Breaking N capacity (ka rms) H /415 V L General circuit-breaker characteristics Page 16 Compact NS100 to 630 circuit breakers for motor protection are the same as those for distribution systems, but are fitted with specific motor trip units. Accompanying trip units Page 49 to 51 MA magnetic trip units provide short-circuit protection. Interchangeable ME electronic trip units provide protection against short-circuits, overloads and phase imbalance. Protection coordination (as defined by IEC ) Whatever the power of the motor, the coordination between the circuit breaker, contactor and relay can be of either type 1 or. Selection depends on operational requirements concerning continuity of service and the technical skills of servicing personnel. All type Merlin Gerin/Telemecanique combinations have been tested under the conditions defined by standards and they are certified ASEFA/LOVAG. Motor protection up to 750 kw Motor rating (kw) Compact NS630b to 1600 Breaking N 50 capacity (ka rms) H /415 V L 150 General circuit-breaker characteristics Page 16 Compact NS630b to 1600 circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic control units are the same as those for distribution systems. Accompanying control units Page 30 Micrologic electronic control units may be used on all Compact NS630b to 1600 circuit breakers. Micrologic.0 A and 5.0 A electronic control units provide protection against short-circuits and overloads. Micrologic 7.0 A provides the same protection functions, plus earth-leakage protection. 44
44 Selection of a trip unit or Micrologic control unit P (kw) (400 V, 50 Hz) Ir (A) Compact NS80H-MA MA Compact NS100 NS50 Compact NS400 NS630 MA STRME STR43ME MA Compact NS630b NS1600 Micrologic.0 A / 5.0 A / 7.0 A 45
45 Functions and characteristics Motor protection Compact NS80H-MA This circuit breaker is specially designed for the protection of motors rated up to 37 kw: c Due to its high current-limiting capacity, it effectively protects motor starters (type- coordination as per IEC , with contactors) c Small size for easy installation in motor control centre (MCC) switchboards. Compact NS80 H-MA Compact circuit breakers Number of poles 3 Control manual (toggle, c direct or extended rotary handle) c electric - Connections fixed front connection c rear connection - withdrawable front connection - rear connection - Electrical characteristics as per IEC Rated current (A) In 65 C 80 Rated insulation Ui 750 voltage (V) Rated impulse Uimp 8 withstand voltage (kv) Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz 690 Ultimate breaking Icu AC 50/60 Hz 0 / 40 V 100 capacity (ka rms) 380 / 415 V V V 5 55V 5 660/690V 6 Service breaking capacity Ics % Icu 100% Utilisation category A Suitability for isolation c Endurance (C-O cycles) mechanical electrical 440 V In/ In Electrical characteristics as per Nema AB1 Breaking capacity (ka) 40 V V V 10 Protection Magnetic trip unit built-in Rating In Instantaneous short-circuit lm adjustable pick-up protection 6 14 x In Earth-leakage protection combination with Vigirex relay Indication and control auxiliaries Indication contacts Voltage releases NS80 H-MA 1 OF + 1 SD MN or M Installation and connections Connections Built-in terminals Terminal extensions and spreaders - Terminal shields c Interphase barriers - DIN rail plate c Dimensions (mm) W x H x D 90 x 10 x 80 Weight (kg)
46 Compact NS100 to 630 circuit breakers with MA magnetic trip units Compact NS100 to 630 circuit breakers, equipped with an MA magnetic trip unit with adjustable thresholds, offer: c Short-circuit protection c Suitability for isolation. Compact NS100 to 630 circuit breakers and the trip unit are supplied already assembled. General circuit-breaker characteristics Page 16 MA trip units Rating (A) at 65 C In Compact N/H/L NS100 c c c c c c circuit breaker NS c c c c NS c c c - - H/L NS c - NS c Short-circuit protection (magnetic) Pick-up Im setting setting setting x In x In x In Compact NS50H Compact NS400H-MA 47
47 Functions and characteristics Compact NS100 to 50 circuit breakers, equipped with an STRME electronic trip unit with adjustable thresholds, offer: c Short-circuit protection c Phase-imbalance protection c Overload protection c Suitability for isolation. Motor protection Compact NS100 to 50 circuit breakers with STRME electronic trip unit Compact NS100 to 50 circuit breakers See the circuit breakers for distribution systems on page 0. STRME electronic trip unit Protection Overload protection LT (long time) protection with adjustable Ir threshold, in compliance with tripping class 10 as defined by IEC Short-circuit protection Short-time and instantaneous protection: c Short-time protection with fixed pick-up (Im = 13 x Ir) and tripping delay c Instantaneous protection with fixed pick-up (15 x In). Phase-imbalance protection This function complies with the stipulations of standard IEC and trips the circuit breaker whenever a phase-current imbalance of 40 % or more occurs. The circuit-breaker opening time is between 3.5 and 6 seconds. Compact NS50 equipped with an STRME electronic trip unit Overload LED (%Ir) A LED on the front indicates the percent load: c OFF: I < 1.05 Ir c Flashing: I u 1.05 Ir Test A mini test kit or a portable test kit may be connected to the test connector on the front to check circuit-breaker operation after installing the trip unit or accessories. Optional SDTAM contactor tripping module (Early-break thermal-fault signal) This module opens the contactor if an overload occurs, thus making it possible to: c Differentiate between tripping due to overloads and short-circuits c Improve continuity of service (no manual reset following tripping due to an overload). This module can also be used to signal a thermal fault. Characteristics c Manual reset (local or remote). c Compatible with the following control voltages: v 4 to 7 V DC and 4 to 48 V AC v 110 to 40 V AC / DC. c Replaces the MN and M voltage releases. 48
48 t Ir 13Ir I 1 long-time threshold tripping class 10 as defined by IEC short-time pick-up 4 short-time tripping delay 5 instantaneous pick-up 6 test connector 7 percent load indication In=50A Ir Ir A ImSTR ME Ir 7,Ir 7,0s 13 Ir 1,05 Ir IEC / cl.10 STRME trip unit Ratings (A) 0 to 70 C NS100N/H/L c - - NS160N/H/L c c - NS50N/H/L c c c Overload protection (Long Time) Current setting Ir adjustable, 10 settings x In Tripping class 10 (IEC ) Time delay (s) fixed (min max.) at 1.5 x Ir at 6 x Ir 6 15 at 7. Ir 4 10 Motor-overload indication LED Phase-imbalance protection in compliance with IEC Tripping threshold u 40% imbalance Time delay 3.5 to 6 seconds Short-circuit protection (Short Time) Pick-up Isd fixed 13 x Ir Accuracy ± 0 % Max. resettable time (ms) fixed 10 Max. break time 60 Short-circuit protection (Instantaneous) Pick-up Ii fixed 15 x In Options SDTAM module Overload protection settings (A) rating (A) thresholds (A) c test 49
49 Functions and characteristics Compact NS400 to 630 circuit breakers, equipped with an STR43ME electronic trip unit with adjustable thresholds, offer: c Short-circuit protection c Phase-imbalance protection c Overload protection c Suitability for isolation. Compact NS630 equipped with an STR43ME electronic trip unit Motor protection Compact NS400 to 630 circuit breakers with STR43ME electronic trip unit Compact NS400 to 630 circuit breakers See the circuit breakers for distribution systems on page 0. STR43ME electronic trip unit Protection Overload protection True (rms) long-time protection with an adjustable threshold: c Io base setting (5 settings from 0.5 to 0.8) and Ir fine adjustment (8 settings from 0.8 to 1) c Adjustable tripping delay, in compliance with tripping classes 10A, 10 and 0 as defined by IEC The STR43ME offers two motor-cooling time constants, associated with the motor starting class: c Short cooling time constant (the same as the heating time constant), providing maximum continuity of service and satisfactory motor protection c Long cooling time constant (four times the heating time constant), providing maximum motor protection. Short-circuit protection Short-time and instantaneous protection: c Short-time protection with adjustable pick-up and fixed tripping delay c Instantaneous protection with fixed pick-up. Phase-imbalance protection This function complies with the stipulations of standard IEC and trips the circuit breaker whenever a phase-current imbalance of 40% or more occurs. The circuit-breaker opening time is 4 seconds ±10%. Indications: Overload LED (%Ir) A LED on the front indicates the percent load: c OFF: I < 1.05 Ir c Flashing: I u 1.05 Ir Fault indications LEDs indicate the type of fault that caused tripping: c Overload (long-time protection) or abnormal component temperature (> Ir) c Short-circuit (short-time protection) or instantaneous (> Isd) c Phase imbalance (LED on the right) c Microprocessor malfunction: v All four (% Ir), (> Ir), (> Isd) and (phase imbalance) LEDs ON. Battery powered. Spare batteries are supplied in an adapter box. When a fault occurs, the LED indicating the type of fault goes OFF after approximately ten minutes to conserve battery power. The information is however stored in memory and the LED can be turned back ON by pressing the battery/led test pushbutton. The LED automatically goes OFF and the memory is cleared when the circuit breaker is reset. Test A mini test kit or a portable test kit may be connected to the test connector on the front to check circuit-breaker operation after installing the trip unit or accessories. The test pushbutton tests the battery and the LEDs. Self monitoring The circuit breaker trips if a microprocessor fault or an abnormal temperature is detected. Options Three options are available: c Ammeter (I) c Contactor tripping module (SDTAM) c Communication (COM). 50
50 t STR 43 ME %Ir >Ir >Isd test fault Ir Isd Ii I 1 long-time threshold tripping class 3 short-time pick-up 4 short-time tripping delay 5 instantaneous pick-up 6 test connector 7 percent load indication Possible combinations: c I c I + COM c SDTAM c SDTAM + I c SDTAM + I + COM 5 Io test x In + - Ir tr 10 10A x Io 0 0 class A Isd x Ir 1 13 IEC µ P > Ir > Im A tsd > Ih Ir I1 I I3 Ir Isd li STR43ME trip unit Ratings (A) 0 to 70 C Circuit NS400N/H/L c c c - breakers NS630N/H/L c Overload protection (Long Time) Current setting Ir adjustable, 40 settings x In Tripping class 10A, 10, 0 (IEC ) Time delay (s) adjustable (min.... max.) at 1.5 x Ir at 6 x Ir at 7. Ir Phase-imbalance protection in compliance with IEC Tripping threshold u 40% imbalance Time delay 4 s ± 10 % Short-circuit protection (Short Time) Pick-up Isd adjustable, 8 settings x Ir Accuracy ± 15 % Time delay (ms) fixed max. resettable time 10 max. break time 60 Short-circuit protection (Instantaneous) Pick-up Ii fixed - 13 x Ir max. Other functions Motor-overload LED Indications module Options Ammeter (I) SDTAM module Communication (COM) Options for STR43ME trip unit c c c c c Ammeter (I) A digital display continuously indicates the current of the phase with the greatest load. The value of each current I1, I, I3 and the long-time current setting Ir may be successively displayed by pressing a scroll button. LEDs indicate the phase for which the current is displayed. Ammeter display limits c Minimum current u 0. x In. Lower currents are not displayed. c Maximum current i 10 x In. tr Optional SDTAM contactor tripping module (Early-break thermal-fault signal) See the information on this optional module on page 44. Communication (COM) This option transmits data to Digipact distribution monitoring and control modules. Transmitted data: c Settings; c Phase currents (rms values); c Highest current of the three phases; c Overload-condition alarm; c Cause of tripping (overload, short-circuit, etc.). 51
51 Functions and characteristics Protection of industrial control panels Overview of solutions Compact NS circuit breakers are specially designed to protect incoming feeders and groups of outgoing circuits on industrial control panels: c Compliance with standards applicable worldwide including IEC and UL 508 / CSA - no. 14 c Overload and short-circuit protection c Isolation with positive contact indication, making it possible to service machines safely by isolating them from all power sources c Installation in universal and functional type enclosures c NA switch-disconnector version. Compact NSC100 ( UL 508 / IEC / CSA-) Rated current (A) Breaking N 18 capacity (ka rms) 380/480 V General circuit-breaker characteristics Page 16 Compact NSC100 circuit breakers are specially designed to protect industrial control panels. Accompanying trip unit Page 5 The built-in TMD thermal-magnetic trip unit provides: c overload protection (adjustable-threshold thermal device) c short-circuit protection (fixed-pick-up magnetic device). Compact NS100 to 630 ( UL 508 / IEC / CSA-) Rated current (A) Compact NS100 NS160 NS50 NS400 NS630 Breaking N capacity (ka rms) H /480 V General circuit-breaker characteristics Page 18 Compact NS100 to 630 circuit breakers are designed for protection of distribution systems and are also suitable for protection of industrial control panels. Accompanying trip unit Page 4 The trip units are interchangeable. Compact NS100 to 50 circuit breakers are equipped with TMD thermal-magnetic or STR electronic trip units. Compact NS400 to 630 circuit breakers are equipped exclusively with STR electronic trip units. 5
52 Circuit breaker NSC100N Compact NS100N circuit breakers are specially designed to protect incoming feeders and groups of outgoing circuits on industrial control panels. Compact NSC100N Compact circuit breaker Number of poles 3 Control manual (toggle, c direct or extended rotary handle) c electric - Connections fixed front connection c rear connection - with- front connection - drawable rear connection - Mounting on DIN rail c NSC100N Electrical characteristics as per IEC Rated current (A) In 40 C 100 Rated insulation Ui 750 voltage (V) Rated impulse Uimp 8 withstand voltage (kv) Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz 690 DC 50 Ultimate breaking capacity Icu AC 0/40 V 4 (ka rms) 50/60 380/415 V 18 Hz 440 V V V 10 DC 15 V 5 50 V ( P) 5 Service breaking capacity Ics % Icu 100% Utilisation category A Suitability for isolation c Endurance (C-O cycles) mechanical electrical 440 V In/ In Electrical characteristics as per UL 508 Breaking capacity (ka) AC 50/60 Hz 40 V V V 10 Protection Built-in thermal-magnetic trip unit Ratings In Instantaneous short-circuit lm fixed pick-up protection (A) Add-on earth-leakage add-on Vigi module protection combination with Vigirex relay Indication and control auxiliaries Auxiliary contacts Early-make or early-break contact Voltage releases c c MN or M Installation and connections Connection built-in terminals Accessories terminal shields c interphase barriers - escutcheons c Dimensions (mm) 3 P 90 x 10 x 80 W x H x D 4 P 10 x 10 x 80 Weight (kg) 3 P P
53 Functions and characteristics Protection of industrial control panels Trip units, auxiliaries, installation enclosures Trip-unit selection P (hp) (480 V, 3P) Ir (A) Compact NSC100N TMD Compact NS100 NS50 Compact NS400 NS630 STRME STR43ME / STR3SE / STR53UE STR electronic trip units are designed for: c Short-circuit protection c Overload protection c Phase-failure protection (STRME and STR43ME). TMD thermal-magnetic trip units are designed for: c Short-circuit protection c Overload protection. Type NA devices are switch-disconnectors which must always be protected upstream in accordance with applicable installation standards. Circuit breakers trip units UL/CSA approvals NSC100N TMD Manual Motor Controller: NA Across the line starter & General use NS100/160/50 N/H STRME Manual Motor Controller: NA Across the line starter TMD Manual Motor Controller: STRSE/GE General Use NS400/630 N/H STR43ME Manual Motor Controller: NA Across the Line Starter STR3SE STR53UE Auxiliaries All auxiliaries can be added to the circuit breaker by the user: c Padlocking devices (in the OFF position); c Rotary handle c Status-indication auxiliary contacts (ON, OFF and tripped) c Shunt (M) or undervoltage (MN) releases c Early-make or early-break contacts. Rotary handle Available in direct or extended versions for mounting up to 590 mm behind front. Versions include: c Black front with black handle c Yellow front with red handle (for machine tools or emergency off as per IEC 04 / VDE 0013). All rotary handles can be padlocked in the OFF position. Optional door interlock, recommended for MCC panels (motor control centres). Early-make or early-break contacts These auxiliary contacts make it possible to de-energise the downstream auxiliary circuits of the control panel as well as the auxiliary circuits supplying the MN release, if applicable. H W D Installation in an enclosure Compact circuit breakers can be installed in a metal enclosure together with other devices (contactors, motor-protection circuit breakers, LEDs, etc.) Minimum enclosure dimensions Circuit breakers Height (mm) Depth (mm) Width (mm) NSC100N NS100 N/H NS160 N/H NS50 N/H NS400 N/H NS630 N/H Installation enclosure 54
54 R R UL 508 / CSA - no. 14 marking The UL 508 / CSA - no. 14 approval is for a Manual Motor Controller ( across the line starter or general use ). The circuit breakers are 100% rated. LISTED MAN. MOTOR. CTRL. 34L NSC100N-NA This MMC is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than the short-circuit current rating of this MMC indicated here below, or the upstream protective device interrupting capability, whichever is less, when protected by any protective device for Group fusing or Group installation. SC current rating ka 50/60 Hz Vac Vac ph 3 ph 1 ph 3 ph 1 ph 3 ph 1 ph 3 ph ratings (A) hp tripping current 15% 100% rated temperature rating tightening torque 75 C wire size lb-inch Nm 14 AWG to 3/0 AWG Cu 1 AWG to 4/0 AWG Al NSC100 device marking (circuit breaker with built-in trip unit) UL / CSA logo Breaking capacity Horsepower rating Cable cross-section and tightening torques LISTED MAN. MOTOR. CTRL. 34L NS N/H/NA Equipped with TMD/DE or STR trip unit This MMC is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than the short-circuit current rating of this MMC indicated here below, or the upstream protective device interrupting capability, whichever is less, when protected by any protective device for Group fusing or Group installation. SC current rating ka 50/60 Hz Vac NS100 NS160 NS50 N H N H N H tripping current 15% 100% rated temperature rating 75 C tightening torque Terminal kit reference wire size lb-inch Nm 3P 4P 14 AWG to 3/0 AWG Cu 1 AWG to 4/0 AWG Al AWG to AWG Cu,Al AWG to 350 kcmil Cu,Al UL / CSA logo Breaking capacity Cable cross-section and tightening torques NS100 to 50 device marking (circuit breaker with interchangeable trip unit) In=0A Ir A STR ME 7, Ir 7,0 s Ir 13Ir > 1,05 Ir IEC / cl.10 0A 1ph3ph V ac hp % rated + - test Trip-unit marking 55
55 Functions and characteristics Earth-leakage protection Overview of solutions Earth-leakage protection is obtained by: c Fitting a Vigi module on the circuit breaker (Compact NS100 to 630) c Installing a Micrologic 7.0 A control unit (Compact NS630b to 300) c Using a Vigirex relay and separate toroids (all Compact circuit breakers). Circuit breakers equipped with an add-on Vigi module (Vigicompact) Rated current (A) Vigicompact NS100 to 50 N/H/L NS400 and 630 N/H/L General circuit-breaker characteristics Page 0 Compact NS100 to 630 circuit breakers are presented in the Protection of distribution systems section. Accompanying Vigi modules Earth-leakage protection is achieved by installing a Vigi module directly on the circuit-breaker terminals. Circuit breakers equipped with a control unit offering integrated earth-leakage protection and an external rectangular sensor Rated current (A) Compact NS630b to 1000 N/H/L NS1600b to 300 NS150 and 1600 N/H Availability to be announced General circuit-breaker characteristics Page Compact NS630b to 300 circuit breakers are presented in the Protection of distribution systems section. Accompanying control units Page 30 Micrologic 7.0 A electronic control units offer earth-leakage protection as standard. Earth-leakage protection using a Vigirex relay Vigirex Earth-leakage relay Separate toroids Compact circuit breaker + Vigirex relay combination Vigirex relays may be used to add external earth-leakage protection to Compact NS circuit breakers. The circuit breakers must be equipped with an MN or M voltage release. Vigirex relays are very useful when special time-delay or tripping-threshold values are required, or when there are major installation constraints (circuit breaker already installed and connected, limited space available, etc.). Vigirex-relay characteristics: c Sensitivity adjustable from 30 ma to 50 ma and eight time-delay settings (0 to 1 second) c Closed toroids (30 to 300 mm in diameter) or split toroids (46 to 110 mm in diameter). Options: c Trip alarm by a fail-safe contact c Pre-alarm LED and contact (threshold = 0.5 x I n) c 400 Hz distribution systems, etc. Compliance with standards: c IEC , appendix B c French decree dated 14 November 1988 c IEC and IEC to 5 covering protection against nuisance tripping due to transient overvoltages, lightning strikes, switching of devices on the distribution system, electrostatic discharges, radiofrequency interference. c IEC 60755, class A, immunity to DC components up to 6 ma c VDE 664, operation down to -5 C. 56
56 Add-on Vigi module (Vigicompact) for Compact NS100 to 630 Vigicompact NS50N ,3 HS t(ms) vigi MH 10 I n(a) 0,03 ( t = 0 ) avant test diélectrique enlever ce couvercle before dielectric test remove this cover vigi NS / 440 V - 50 / 60 Hz 1 sensitivity setting time-delay setting (for selective earth-fault protection) 3 lead-seal fixture for controlled access to settings 4 test button simulating an earth-fault for regular checks on the tripping function 5 reset button (reset required after earth-fault tripping) 6 rating plate 7 housing for SDV auxiliary contact Plug-in circuit breaker The Vigi module can be installed on a plug-in base. Special accessories are required (see the section on part numbers). T R N T Vigicompact NS100 to 630 circuit breakers with earth-leakage protection Addition of the Vigi module does not alter circuit-breaker characteristics: c Compliance with standards c Degree of protection, class II front-face isolation c Positive contact indication c Electrical characteristics c Trip-unit characteristics c Installation and connection modes c Indication, measurement and control auxiliaries c Installation and connection accessories. Dimensions and weights NS100/160 NS50 NS400/630 Dimensions 3 poles 105 x 36 x x 355 x 110 W x H x D (mm) 4 poles 140 x 36 x x 355 x 110 Weight (kg) 3 poles poles Vigi earth-leakage protection module Compliance with standards: c IEC , appendix B c French decree dated 14 November 1988 c IEC and IEC to 5 covering protection against nuisance tripping due to transient overvoltages, lightning strikes, switching of devices on the distribution system, electrostatic discharges, radiofrequency interference. c IEC 60755, class A, immunity to DC components up to 6 ma c VDE 664, operation down to -5 C. Remote indications Vigi modules may be equipped with an auxiliary contact (SDV) to remotely signal tripping due to an earth fault. Power supply Vigi modules are self-supplied internally by the distribution-system voltage and therefore do not require any external source. They continue to function even when supplied by only two phases. Vigi module selection table Vigi ME Vigi MH Vigi MB Number of poles 3, 4 (1) 3, 4 (1) 3, 4 (1) NS100 N/H/L c c - NS160 N/H/L c c - NS50 N/H/L - c - NS400 N/H/L - - c NS630 N/H/L - - c Protection characteristics Sensitivity fixed adjustable adjustable I n (A) Time delay Intentional fixed adjustable adjustable delay (ms) < () 150 () 310 () Max. breaking < 40 < 40 <140 <300 <800 < 40 < 140 < 300 < 800 time (ms) Rated voltage V AC 50/60 Hz (1) Vigi 3P modules may also be used on 3P circuit breakers used for single-phase or two-phase protection. () If the sensitivity is set to 30 ma, there is no time delay, whatever the time-delay setting. 57
57 Functions and characteristics Control and isolation Overview of solutions Masterpact NW or Compact Masterpact NW Source coupling switch-disconnector Masterpact NW or Compact Main power distribution board for commercial applications 1000 A ka Main power distribution board for industrial applications 1600 A 0-80 ka Replacement source Modular subdistribution board Industrial distribution board Automation cabinet 160 A 15-5 ka 400 A 160 A : 15-5 ka 400 A : 0-80 ka Sourcechangeover system Local isolation enclosure Final distribution enclosure for commercial applications Local isolation enclosure Control panel Local isolation enclosure 10 ka 5 ka 63 A 10 ka 40 A 5 ka 5-15 ka 63 A 630 A 15 A M M M M M N.B. adjacent to or built into the machine Circuit breakerdisconnector building utilities building final distribution continuous processes manufacturing processes individual machines Switchdisconnector standardised symbols Switch-disconnectors Masterpact Compact NS Interpact INS Compact NS Vario Compact NS Interpact IN Interpact INS NG15 Multi 9 58
58 Compact switch-disconnectors are used to control and isolate electrical distribution circuits. In addition to these basic functions, other functions for safety, remote control and convenience include: c Earth-leakage protection c Auxiliary MN/M releases c Remote operation c Ammeter, etc. Compact switch-disconnectors may be interlocked with another Compact switch-disconnector or circuit breaker to constitute a source-changeover system. Compact NS50 switch-disconnector Compact switch-disconnector equipped with a Vigi earthleakage module Compact switch-disconnector equipped with a motor mechanism MN/M voltage release 59
59 Functions and characteristics Control and disconnection NS100NA to 630NA switch-disconnectors Installation standards require upstream protection. However, due to their high-set magnetic release, Compact NS100NA to 630NA switch-disconnectors are self protected. Compact NS100NA Compact switch-disconnectors Number of poles Control manual toggle direct or extended rotary handle electric Connections fixed front connection plug-in (on base) withdrawable (on chassis) rear connection front connection rear connection front connection rear connection Electrical characteristics as per IEC and EN Conventional thermal current (A) Ith 60 C Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui Rated impulse withstand voltage (kv) Uimp Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz DC Rated operational current le AC 50/60 Hz 0/40 V 380/415 V 440/480 V () 500/55 V 660/690 V DC 50 V (1 P) 500 V ( P in series) Short-circuit making capacity lcm (ka peak) minimum (switch-disconnector alone) maximum (with protection circuit breaker upstream) Short-time withstand current lcw (A rms) 1 s 3 s 0 s Suitability for isolation Endurance (C-O cycles) Positive contact indication Pollution degree Protection Add-on earth-leakage protection Additional indication and control auxiliaries Indication contacts Voltage releases Voltage-presence indicator Current-transformer module Ammeter module Insulation-monitoring module mechanical electrical AC 690 V AC A 440 V AC 3A DC 50 V DC 3A Remote communication by bus Device status indications (communicating auxiliary contacts) Device remote operation (communicating motor mechanism) M shunt release MN undervoltage release add-on Vigi module combination with Vigirex relay Installation Accessories terminal extensions and spreaders terminal shields and interphase barriers escutcheons Dimensions (mm) fixed, front connection /3P W x H x D 4P Weight (kg) fixed, front connection 3P 4P Source-changeover system (see section on source-changeover systems) Manual source-changeover systems Remote-operated and automatic source-changeover systems (1) P in 3P case () Suitable for 480 V NEMA 60
60 NS100NA NS160NA NS50NA NS400NA NS630NA (1), 3,4 (1), 3,4 (1), 3,4 3, 4 3, 4 c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c AC A AC 3 A AC A AC 3 A AC A AC 3 A AC A AC 3 A AC A AC 3 A DC A DC 3 A DC A DC 3 A DC A DC 3 A DC A DC 3 A DC A DC 3 A c c c c c ( In/) 0000 ( In/) ( In/) 6000 ( In/) 4000 ( In/) ( In/) 0000 ( In/) ( In/) 6000 ( In/) 4000 ( In/) c c c c c III III III III III c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c 105 x 161 x x 55 x x 161 x x 55 x to to. 6.8 c c c c 61
61 Functions and characteristics Installation standards require upstream protection. Compact NS800NA Control and disconnection Compact NS630bNA to NS1600NA switch-disconnectors Compact switch-disconnectors Number of poles Control manual toggle direct or extended rotary handle electric Connections fixed front connection withdrawable (on chassis) rear connection front connection rear connection Electrical characteristics as per IEC and EN Conventional thermal current (A) Ith 60 C Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui Rated impulse withstand voltage (kv) Uimp Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz DC Rated operational current le AC 50/60 Hz 0/40 V 380/415 V 440/480 V (1) 500/55 V 660/690 V DC 50 V (1 P) 500 V ( P in series) Short-circuit making capacity lcm (ka peak) minimum (switch-disconnector alone) maximum (with protection circuit breaker upstream) () Short-time withstand current lcw (A rms) 0.5 s 1 s 0 s Suitability for isolation Endurance (C-O cycles) Positive contact indication Pollution degree Protection Add-on earth-leakage protection Additional indication and control auxiliaries Indication contacts Voltage releases Remote communication by bus Device status indications (communicating auxiliary contacts) Device remote operation (communicating motor mechanism) Installation Accessories mechanical electrical AC 690 V AC A/In 440 V AC 3A/In M shunt release MN undervoltage release combination with Vigirex relay terminal extensions and spreaders terminal shields and interphase barriers escutcheons Dimensions (mm) fixed 3P W x H x D 4P Weight (kg) fixed 3P 4P Source-changeover system (see section on source-changeover systems) Manual source-changeover systems, remote-operated and automatic (1) Suitable for 480 V NEMA. () Protection by upstream type NS or NW circuit breaker: see additional technical information. 6
62 NS630bNA NS800NA NS1000NA NS150NA NS1600NA c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c c AC A AC 3 A AC A AC 3 A AC A AC 3 A AC A AC 3 A AC A AC 3 A DC A DC 3 A DC A DC 3 A DC A DC 3 A DC A DC 3 A DC A DC 3 A c c c c c c c c c c III III III III III c c c c c c c c c 37 x 10 x x 80 x c 63
63 Functions and characteristics Control and disconnection Compact NS1600b to 300NA switch-disconnectors Installation standards require upstream protection. However, Compact NS1600b to 300NA switch-disconnectors are selfprotected for all currents higher than 55 ka. Compact NS000NA Availability to be announced Compact switch-disconnectors Number of poles Control manual toggle direct or extended rotary handle electric Connections fixed front connection withdrawable (on chassis) rear connection front connection rear connection Electrical characteristics as per IEC and EN Conventional thermal current (A) Ith 60 C Rated insulation voltage (V) Ui Rated impulse withstand voltage (kv) Uimp Rated operational voltage (V) Ue AC 50/60 Hz DC Rated operational current le AC 50/60 Hz 0/40 V 380/415 V 440/480 V (1) 500/55 V 660/690 V Short-circuit making capacity lcm (ka peak) minimum (switch-disconnector alone) maximum (with protection circuit breaker upstream) () Short-time withstand current lcw (A rms) 0.5 s 1 s 0 s Suitability for isolation Endurance (C-O cycles) mechanical electrical AC 690 V AC A/In 440 V AC 3A/In Positive contact indication Pollution degree Protection Add-on earth-leakage protection Additional indication and control auxiliaries Indication contacts Voltage releases M shunt release MN undervoltage release combination with Vigirex relay Installation Accessories escutcheons Dimensions (mm) fixed 3P W x H x D 4P Weight (kg) fixed 3P 4P Source-changeover system (see section on source-changeover systems) Manual source-changeover systems, remote-operated and automatic (1) Suitable for 480 V NEMA. () Protection by upstream type NS or NW circuit breaker: see additional technical information. 64
64 NS1600bNA NS000NA NS500NA NS300NA c c c c c c c c AC A AC 3 A AC A AC 3 A AC A AC 3 A AC A AC 3 A c c c c c c c c III III III III c c c c c 350 x 40 x x 535 x
65 Functions and characteristics Source-changeover systems Presentation For complete, in-depth information, see the Interpact, Compact, Masterpact source-changeover systems catalogue. Manual source-changeover systems This is the most simple type. Intervention by technical personnel is required, i.e. transfer from the normal source to the replacement source is not immediate. A manual source-changeover system can be installed on two to three manually-controlled circuit breakers or switch-disconnectors. Interlocking is mechanical. Interlocks prevent connection to both sources at the same time, even momentarily. Remote-operated source-changeover systems This is the most commonly employed system. No human intervention is required. Switching from the normal to the replacement source is controlled electrically. A remote-operated source-changeover system is made up of two or three circuit breakers or switch-disconnectors linked by an electrical interlocking system (different configurations possible). Device operation is backed up by a mechanical interlocking fixture that prevents parallel connection if the electrical system malfunctions or if an incorrect manual operation is attempted. Service sector c Hospital operating rooms. c Safety systems for tall buildings. c Computer rooms (banks, insurance companies, etc.). c Lighting systems in shopping centres. Automatic source-changeover systems An automatic controller may be added to the remote-operated source-changeover system for automatic source control according to programmable operating modes. This solution ensures optimum energy management: c Switching to a replacement source depending on external requirements c Management of power sources c Regulation c Emergency source replacement, etc. The automatic controller may be fitted with an option for communication with a supervisor. Industry c Assembly lines. c Engine rooms on ships. c Critical auxiliaries in thermal power stations. Infrastructure c Port and railway installations. c Runway lighting systems. c Control systems for military installations. 66
66 Manual source-changeover systems A manual source-changeover system can be installed on two to three manually-operated circuit breakers or switch-disconnectors. Interlocking is mechanical. Interlocks prevent connection to both sources at the same time, even momentarily. Interlocking of two toggle-controlled devices Interlocking of two or three toggle-controlled devices Two devices can be interlocked using this system. Two identical interlocking systems can be used to interlock three devices installed side by side, in which case one device is in the ON position and the two others are in the OFF position. The system is locked using one or two padlocks (shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm). Combinations of Normal and Replacement devices There are two interlocking-system models: c Compact NS100 to 50 c Compact NS400 to 630 (can also be used for a Compact NS100 to 50). Devices must be either all fixed or all withdrawable. Interlocking of two devices with rotary handles The rotary handles are padlocked with the devices in the OFF position. The mechanism inhibits the two devices being closed at the same time, but does allow for both to be open (OFF) at the same time. Combinations of Normal and Replacement devices All Compact NS100 to 1600 circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors with rotary handles can be interlocked. Interlocking of a Compact NS100 to 630 with a Compact NS630b to 1600 is not possible. Interlocking of a number of devices using keylocks (captive keys) Interlocking uses two identical keylocks with a single key. This solution enables interlocking between two devices that are physically distant or that have significantly different characteristics, for example between a low and a medium-voltage device, or between Compact NS circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors. A system of wall-mounted units with captive keys makes possible a large number of combinations between many devices. Combinations of Normal and Replacement devices All Compact NS100 to 1600 circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors with rotary handles or motor mechanisms can be interlocked. Interlocking of two devices with rotary handles Interlocking of two devices on a base plate A base plate designed for two Compact devices can be installed horizontally or vertically on a mounting rail. Interlocking is carried out on the base plate by a mechanism located behind the devices. Access to the device controls and trip units is not blocked. Combinations of Normal and Replacement devices All manually operated Compact NS100 to 630 circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors can be interlocked. Devices must be fixed or plug-in versions, with or without earth-leakage protection or measurement modules. Interlocking with keylocks Interlocking on base plates 67
67 Functions and characteristics Source-changeover systems Remote-operated systems Source-changeover system without a controller In this case, the automatic-control system to initiate changeovers between the Normal and Replacement sources under predefined conditions must be provided by the installation designer. 4 Remote-operated source-changeover system 3 1 Auxiliary control plate Controller Source-changeover system with a controller In this case, changeovers between the Normal and Replacement sources under predefined conditions are initiated by a Merlin Gerin controller. 5 6 Compact NS630b to 1600 Interlocking by rods Interlocking by cables Coupling accessory This accessory may be used with the source-changeover system (with or without a controller) to facilitate connections. 7 A remote-operated source-changeover system is made up of: 1 circuit breaker QN equipped with a motor mechanism and auxiliary contacts, connected to the Normal source circuit breaker QR equipped with a motor mechanism and auxiliary contacts, connected to the Replacement source 3 mounting base plate with mechanical interlocking (NS100 to 630) or an interlocking system using rods or cables (NS630b to 1600) 4 electrical interlocking unit. IVE for NS100 to 630 or an electrical system provided by the installer for NS630b to Electrical interlocking system example: part no in the source-changeover system catalogue. Switching between sources can be automated by adding: 5 ACP auxiliary control plate 6 BA or UA controller, or an electrical system provided by the installer for NS630b to Electrical system example: part no and in the sourcechangeover system catalogue. Accessory: 7 coupling accessory (downstream connection) for NS100 to
68 Controllers When used with a remote-operated source-changeover system, the BA or UA controllers initiate the automatic changeover operations according to user-defined sequences. BA controller UA controller Controller BA UA Four-position switch Automatic operation c c Forced operation on Normal source c c Forced operation on Replacement source c c Stop (both Normal and Replacement sources OFF) c c Automatic operation Monitoring of the Normal source and automatic changeover c c Engine generator set start-up control c Delayed shutdown (adjustable) of engine generator set c Load shedding and reconnection of non-priority loads c Changeover to Replacement source if one of the Normal- c source phases is absent Test By opening of the P5M circuit breaker upstream of the controller By pressing the test button on the front of the controller Indications Circuit-breaker status indication on the front c c of the controller: ON, OFF, fault trip Automatic-mode indication contact c c Other functions Selection of type of Normal source c (single-phase or three-phase) Voluntary transfer to Replacement source c c (e.g. energy-management commands) During peak-tariff periods (energy-management commands), c forced operation on Normal source if Replacement source is not operational Additional control contact (not in controller). c c Transfer to Replacement source only if contact closed (e.g. UR frequency check) Replacement-source maximum start-up time setting c Options Communications option Power supply Control voltages (1) 0 to 40 V 50/60 Hz c c 380 to 415 V 50/60 Hz c c 440 V 60 Hz c c Operating thresholds Undervoltage 0.35 Un i voltage i 0.7 Un c c Phase failure 0.5 Un i voltage i 0.7 Un c Voltage presence voltage u 0.85 Un c c Characteristics of output contacts Rated thermal current (A) 8 Minimum load 10 ma at 1 V AC DC Utilisation category (IEC ) AC1 AC13 AC14 AC15 DC1 DC13 Operational current (A) 4 V V V /40 V V /415 V V /690 V (1) Power supplied by the ACP auxiliary control plate. The supply voltage must be the same for the ACP plate, the IVE unit and the circuit breaker operating mechanisms. If this voltage is the same as the distribution-system voltage, the Normal and Replacement sources can be used directly for the power supply. If not, a BC-type or equivalent isolation transformer must be used. c c c 69
69 Functions and characteristics Communication Compact NS100 to 630 Integration of the circuit breaker or the switch-disconnector in a supervison system requires either the communicating auxiliaries or the SC150 interface. Compact devices fit perfectly in the SMS Powerlogic electrical installation management system by communicating using Digipact protocols. An external gateway offers communication via other networks including: Profibus Ethernet There are two possibilities for the 100 to 630 A range: Communicating auxiliaries They replace the standard auxiliaries and connect directly to the Digipact bus. Three equipment levels: Communicating auxiliary contacts, comprising: - OF (on/off), SD (trip indication) and SDE (fault-trip indication) contacts - Electronic module - Prefabricated wiring. Communicating auxiliary contacts and motor-mechanism module, comprising: - OF (on/off), SD (trip indication) and SDE (fault-trip indication) contacts - Motor-mechanism module (0 V AC) (1) - Electronic module - Prefabricated wiring. Communicating carriage switches for the chassis, comprising: - CE / CD (connected/disconnected position) contacts - Electronic module - Wiring connector. SC150 interface Using the SC150 interface, it is possible to integrate a device equipped with noncommunicating auxiliaries into a supervison system. The SC150 interface is used to connect: The auxiliary contacts on the circuit breaker (OF, SD, SDE, SDV, CD, CE) The remote-operation system (on, off, reset) The communication output for the STR53UE and STR43ME electronic trip units equipped with the COM option An unassigned digital input. Compact NS equipped with communicating auxiliary contacts and motor-mechanism module Withdrawable Compact NS on its chassis equipped with communicating auxiliary contacts SC150 indication and control interface (1) For voltages other than 0 V AC, use a standard motor-mechanism module (noncommunicating) together with an SC150 indication and control interface. 70
70 Overview of functions Software Communication interface Communication Bus RS 3C,Ethernet RS 485 Data concentrator DC150 Device SC150 indication and control interface Digipact Bus Compact NS with communicating auxiliary contacts and motor mechanism Compact circuit breaker with standard auxiliary contacts and motor mechanism. Trip unit with the COM option. : hard wire : communication bus Compact with communicating SC150 auxiliaries Device identification Address c c Rating - - Indication of status conditions OF (on/off) c c SD (trip indication) c c SDE (fault-trip indication) c c CE/CD (connected/disconnected position) c c Controls ON/OFF c c LED reset c c Protection settings Reading of the protection settings Operating and maintenance aids Measurements: currents c Fault readings: type of fault c Indications: operation counter c c c 71
71 Functions and characteristics Communication Compact NS630b to 1600 COM option in Compact The COM option is required for integration of the circuit breaker or switch-disconnector in a supervision system. Compact uses the Digipact or Modbus communications protocol for full compatibility with the SMS PowerLogic electrical-installation management systems. An external gateway is available for communication on other networks: c Profibus c Ethernet Digipact "device" communication module. Digipact "chassis" communication module For fixed circuit breakers, the COM option is made up of: c A "device" communication module, installed behind the Micrologic control unit and supplied with its set of sensors (OF, SD, SDE micro-contacts for manually operated devices; OF, SDE micro-contacts for electrically operated devices) and its kit for connection to a communicating motor-mechanism module. For withdrawable circuit breakers, the COM option is made up of: c A "device" communication module, installed behind the Micrologic control unit and supplied with its set of sensors (OF, SD, SDE micro-contacts for manually operated devices; OF, SDE micro-contacts for electrically operated devices) and its kit for connection to a communicating motor-mechanism module. c A "chassis" communication module supplied separately with its set of sensors (CE, CD and CT contacts). Status indication by the COM option is independent of the circuit breaker indication contacts. These contacts remain available for conventional uses. Digipact or Modbus "device" communication module This module is independent of the control unit. It receives and transmits information on the communication network. An infra-red link transmits data between the control unit and the communication module. Consumption: 30 ma, 4 V. Digipact or Modbus "chassis" communication module This module is independent of the control unit. The Modbus "chassis" communication module makes it possible to address the chassis and to maintain the address when the circuit breaker is in the disconnected position. Consumption: 30 ma, 4 V. Communicating motor-mechanism module A bus link is used to transmit remote ON/OFF orders to the circuit breaker. A communicating motor-mechanism module must be used. The remote-tripping function (M or MN) is independent of the communication option. Communication bus Communication bus 1 OF SD SDE 3 1 OF SDE 3 5 Modbus "device" communication module Manually operated fixed device Electrically operated fixed device Communication bus Communication bus Modbus "chassis" communication module 1 CD CT CE OF SD SDE CD CT CE OF SDE Manually operated drawout device 1 "device" communication module "chassis" communication module 3 OF, SD, SDE "device" sensors Electrically operated drawout device 4 CE, CD and CT "chassis" sensors 5 communicating motor-mechanism module 7
72 Overview of functions POWERLOGIC System Manager Demo Time Ready File Edit View Setup Tools Control Display Reports Window Help 1,0 1,00 0,80 0,60 0,40 0,0 0,00 Event Sampling Mode : MANUAL Phase A-N Voltage - Harmonics Analysis 5 seconds Module H H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 H8 H9 H10 H11 H1 Harmonics Fundamental: RMS: RMS-H: Peak: Phase 1-N Harmonics(RMS) H1: H: 0.01 H3: 0.45 H4: 0.03 H5: 0.45 H6: 0.04 H7: 1.7 H8: 0.05 H9: 0.4 H10: 0.01 H11: 1.03 H1: 0.07 ONLINE: DEMO No working system 9:30 CF: THD: OK Compact switch-disconnectors are compatible only with the Digipact COM option. Compact circuit breakers are compatible with the Digipact or Modbus COM option. The COM option may be used with all types of control units to: c Identify the device c Indicate status conditions c Control the device. Depending on the different types of Micrologic (S, A) control units, the COM option also offers: c Setting of the protections functions c Analysis of the AC-power parameters for operating-assistance and maintenance purposes switch-disconnector with circuit breaker with communication bus communication bus Digipact Modbus Digipact Modbus device identification address c - A S rating - - A type of device - - type of control unit - - A type of long-time rating plug - - A status indications OF (on/off) c - S A SD (trip indication) c - S A SDE (fault-trip indication) c - S A CE/CD (connected/ c - S A disconnected position) controls M/F ON/OFF - - S A spring charging - - reset of the mechanical - - indicator AZA protections settings reading of protections settings A operating and maintenance aids measurements current A fault readings type of fault Note. See the description of the Micrologic control units for further details on protection. 73
73 Functions and characteristics Communication Compact NS630b to 1600 (cont.) Compact in a communication network Software Communication interface Communication Bus RS 3C,Ethernet RS 485 Data concentrator DC150 Device Digipact Bus Modbus Bus Compact Compact Devices Circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic control units may be connected to either a Digipact or Modbus communication bus. The information made available depends on the type of Micrologic control unit (S, A) and on the type of communication bus (Digipact or Modbus). Switch-disconnectors may be connected exclusively to the Digipact communication bus. Communication bus Digipact The Digipact bus is the internal bus of the low-voltage switchboard in which the Digipact communicating devices are installed (Compact with Digipact COM, PM150, SC150, UA150, etc.). This bus must be equipped with a DC150 data concentrator (see the Powerlogic System catalogue). Addresses Addressing is carried out by the DC150 data concentrator. Number of devices The maximum number of devices that may be connected to the Digipact bus is calculated in terms of communication points. These points correspond to the amount of traffic the bus can handle. The total number of points for the various devices connected to a single bus must not exceed 100. If the required devices represent more than 100 points, add a second Digipact internal bus. Communicating device Number of points DC150 data concentrator 4 Micrologic + Digipact COM 4 PM150 4 SC150 4 UA150 4 Length of bus The maximum recommended length for the Digipact internal bus is 00 meters. Bus power source Power is supplied by the DC150 data concentrator (4 V).. 74
74 Modbus The Modbus RS485 (JBus) system is an open bus on which communicating Modbus devices (Compact with Modbus COM, PM300, Sepam, Vigilohm, etc.) are installed. All types of PLCs and microcomputers may be connected to the bus. Addresses The software layer of the Modbus protocol can manage up to 55 addresses (1 to 55). The device communication module comprises three addresses linked to: Circuit-breaker manager; Measurement manager; Protection manager. The chassis communication module comprises one address linked to: The chassis manager. The division of the system into four managers secures data exchange with the supervision system and the circuit-breaker actuators. The manager addresses are automatically derived from the circuit-breaker entered via the Micrologic control unit (the default address is 47). logic Circuit-breaker manager (1 to + 50 Chassis manager (51 to + 00 Measurement managers (01 to Protection manager (101 to 147) Number of devices The maximum number of devices that may be connected to the Modbus bus depends on the type of device (Compact with Modbus COM, PM300, Sepam, Vigilohm, etc.), the baud rate (1900 is recommended), the volume of data exchanged and the desired response time. The RS485 physical layer offers up to 3 connection points on the bus (1 master, 31 slaves). A fixed device requires only one connection point (communication module on the device). A drawout device uses two connection points (communication modules on the device and on the chassis). The number must never exceed 31 fixed devices or 15 drawout devices. Length of bus The maximum recommended length for the Modbus bus is 100 meters. Bus power source A 4 V DC power supply is required (less than 0% ripple, insulation class II). Communication interface The Modbus bus may be connected to the central processing device in any of three manners: Direct link to a PLC. The communication interface is not required if the PLC is equipped with a Modbus port; Direct link to a computer. The Modbus (RS485) / Serial port (RS3) communication interface is required; Connection to a TCP/IP (Ethernet) network. The Modbus (RS485) / TCP/IP (Ethernet) communication interface is required. Software To make use of the information provided by the communicating devices, software with a Modbus driver must be used. Micrologic utilities This is a set of Modbus drivers that may be used with a PC to: Display the variables (I, U, P, E, etc.) with the DDS (Data Display Software) application; Read/write the settings with the RSS (Remote Setting Software) application; Remotely control (ON / OFF) the device with the CSS (Control Command Software) application. This software is available on request. System Manager Software (SMS) SMS is power management software for the control and monitoring of LV and MV electrical installations. The SMS family includes a number of products for all types of applications, from standalone systems to networked power management of multiple buildings. SMS can communicate with all intelligent devices of the electrical installation including: c Power Meter and Circuit Monitor products c LV circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors c Sepam units. 75
75 Functions and characteristics Communication Compact NS1600b to 300 COM option in Compact The COM option is required for integration of the circuit breaker or switch-disconnector in a supervision system. Compact uses the Digipact or Modbus communications protocol for full compatibility with the SMS PowerLogic electrical-installation management systems. An external gateway is available for communication on other networks: c Profibus c Ethernet For fixed circuit breakers, the COM option is made up of: c A "device" communication module, installed behind the Micrologic control unit and supplied with its set of sensors (OF, SD, SDE micro-contacts). Status indication by the COM option is independent of the circuit breaker indication contacts. These contacts remain available for conventional uses. Digipact or Modbus "device" communication module This module is independent of the control unit. It receives and transmits information on the communication network. An infra-red link transmits data between the control unit and the communication module. Consumption: 30 ma, 4 V. Bus de communication Digipact "device" communication module. OF SD SDE 1 Boîtier COM Modbus "device" communication module 1 "Device" communication module OF, SD, SDE "device" sensors 76
76 Overview of functions POWERLOGIC System Manager Demo Time Ready File Edit View Setup Tools Control Display Reports Window Help 1,0 1,00 0,80 0,60 0,40 0,0 0,00 Event Sampling Mode : MANUAL Phase A-N Voltage - Harmonics Analysis 5 seconds Module H H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 H8 H9 H10 H11 H1 Harmonics Fundamental: RMS: RMS-H: Peak: Phase 1-N Harmonics(RMS) H1: H: 0.01 H3: 0.45 H4: 0.03 H5: 0.45 H6: 0.04 H7: 1.7 H8: 0.05 H9: 0.4 H10: 0.01 H11: 1.03 H1: 0.07 ONLINE: DEMO No working system 9:30 CF: THD: OK Compact switch-disconnectors are compatible only with the Digipact COM option. Compact circuit breakers are compatible with the Digipact or Modbus COM option. The COM option may be used with all types of control units to: c Identify the device c Indicate status conditions c Control the device. Depending on the different types of Micrologic (S, A) control units, the COM option also offers: c Setting of the protections functions c Analysis of the AC-power parameters for operating-assistance and maintenance purposes switch-disconnector with circuit breaker with communication bus communication bus Digipact Modbus Digipact Modbus device identification address c - A S rating - - A type of device - - type of control unit - - A type of long-time rating plug - - A status indications OF (on/off) c - S A SD (trip indication) c - S A SDE (fault-trip indication) c - S A AZA protections settings reading of protections settings A operating and maintenance aids measurements current A fault readings type of fault Note. See the description of the Micrologic control units for further details on protection. 77
77 Functions and characteristics Installation, connection and accessories Compact NS80H-MA Sealable terminal shield Auxiliary contact Direct rotary handle DIN-rail plate Voltage release Sealable terminal shield Extended rotary handle Auxiliary contact 78
78 Compact NSC100N Front accessory for NSC100N (45 mm standard door cutout) 45 mm front Sealable terminal shield Auxiliary contact Voltage release Extended rotary handle Sealable terminal shield 79
79 Functions and characteristics Installation positions Installation, connection and accessories Compact NS80H-MA, NSC100N Installation Compact NS80H-MA and NSC100N circuit breakers may be mounted vertically, horizontally or flat on their back without any derating of characteristics. They are designed for easy installation in the various types of switchboards of each market and country. Mounting on a DIN rail is possible using a special adapter. These three circuit breakers are available in the fixed, front-connection version. NS80H-MA and NSC100N: mounting on backplate or mounting plate. NS80H-MA and NSC100N: mounting on DIN rail (optional). Standard 45 mm front, optional on NSC100N. Front connection of bare cables Compact NS80H-MA, NSC100N circuit breakers are equipped as standard with connectors for bare copper or aluminium cables from 1.5 to 70 mm. Distribution connector This connector screws directly to the standard connectors. It is used to connect up to three cables: c Flexible cables from 1 to 10 mm c Rigid cables from 1.5 to 16 mm c With crimped or self-crimping ferrules from 1.5 to 4 mm. Insulation of live parts Terminal shields Insulating accessories used for protection against direct contact with power circuits (degree of protection IP 40). They are supplied with sealing accessories. For voltages u 500 V, terminal shields are mandatory. Distribution connector Terminal shields 80
80 Indication contacts Common-point changeover contacts provide remote circuitbreaker status information. They can be used for indications, electrical locking, relaying, etc. M or MN voltage release Indication contacts A single type of contact, complying with the IEC international recommendation, provides different indication functions, depending on where it is inserted in the device. c OF (ON/OFF) - indicates the position of the circuit breaker contacts c SD (trip indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to: v An overload v A short-circuit v Operation of a voltage release. Returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset. All the above auxiliary contacts are also available in low-level versions capable of switching very low loads (e.g. for the control of PLCs or electronic circuits). Characteristics Contacts Standard Low level Rated thermal current (A) 6 5 Minimum load 10 ma at 4 V 1 ma at 4 V Utilisation category (IEC ) AC1 AC15 DC1 DC14 AC1 AC15 DC1 DC14 Operational 4 V current (A) 48 V V /40 V V /440 V Remote tripping M or MN voltage releases are used to trip the circuit breaker. MN undervoltage release This release trips the circuit breaker when the control voltage drops below a tripping threshold: c Tripping threshold between 0.35 and 0.7 times the rated voltage c Circuit breaker closing is possible only if the voltage exceeds 0.85 times the rated voltage. Circuit breaker tripping by an MN release meets the requirements of standard IEC Time-delay unit for an MN release (Compact NS80H-MA) Eliminates nuisance tripping due to transient voltage dips lasting i 00 ms : It is used in conjunction with: c A 50 V DC MN release, control voltage 0/40 V AC c A 48 V DC MN release, control voltage 48 V AC. M shunt release Trips the circuit breaker when the control voltage rises above 0.7 x Un. Control signals can be of the impulse type (u 0 ms) or maintained. Operation When the circuit breaker has been tripped by an MN or M release, it must be reset locally. MN or M tripping takes priority over manual closing. In the presence of a standing trip order, closing of the contacts, even temporary, is not possible. Mechanical characteristics c Endurance is equal to 50% of the mechanical endurance of the circuit breaker c The releases clip in behind the front cover c Connection using wires up to 1.5 mm to integrated terminal blocks. Electrical characteristics c Consumption: v Pick-up (M): < 30 VA v Seal-in (MN): < 5 VA c Response time: < 50 ms. 81
81 Functions and characteristics Installation, connection and accessories Compact NS80H-MA, NSC100N(cont.) Compact NS80H-MA with a direct rotary handle Compact NS80H-MA with an extended rotary handle Rotary handles There are two types of rotary handle: c Direct rotary handle c Extended rotary handle. There are two models: c Standard with a black handle c VDE with a red handle and yellow front for machine-tool control. Direct rotary handle (NS80H-MA and NSC100N) Degree of protection IP40, IK07. The direct rotary handle maintains: c Visibility of and access to trip unit settings c Suitability for isolation c Indication of the three positions O (OFF), I (ON) and tripped c Access to the push to trip button c Circuit breaker locking capability in the OFF position by one to three padlocks, shackle diameter Ø 5 to 8 mm (not supplied). It replaces the circuit-breaker front cover. Accessories transform the standard direct rotary handle for the following situations: c Motor control centre (MCC) switchboards: v Door opening disabled when the circuit breaker is ON v Circuit-breaker closing is disabled if the door is open c A higher degree of protection (IP43, IK07) c Machine-tool control, complying with CNOMO E , IP 54, IK08. Extended rotary handle Degree of protection IP 55, IK08. This handle makes it possible to operate circuit breakers installed at the back of switchboards, from the switchboard front. It maintains: c Suitability for isolation c Indication of the three positions O (OFF), I (ON) and tripped c Access to trip unit settings, when the switchboard door is open c Circuit breaker locking capability in the OFF position by one to three padlocks, shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm (not supplied). The door cannot be opened if the circuit breaker is ON or locked. The extended rotary handle is made up of: c A unit that replaces the front cover of the circuit breaker (secured by screws) c An assembly (handle and front plate) on the door that is always secured in the same position, whether the circuit breaker is installed vertically or horizontally c An extension shaft that must be adjusted to the distance (min/max distance between back of circuit breaker and door is 185/600 mm). 8
82 Locking systems Locking in the OFF position guarantees isolation as per IEC Padlocking systems can receive up to three padlocks with shackle diameters ranging from 5 to 8 mm (padlocks not supplied). Toggle locking using a removable device Outgoing-circuit identification Compact NS80H-MA and NSC100N devices come with clip-in labels for handwritten indications. It is also possible to use pre-printed Telemecanique labels (part number AB1-** (8 digits). Identification accessories 83
83 Functions and characteristics Installation, connection and accessories Compact NS100 to 630 (fixed version) Sealable terminal shield Voltage-presence indicator One-piece spreader Connectors Rear connector Interphase barriers Rear insulating screens Auxiliary contact Voltage release Direct rotary handle Motor-mechanism module Extended rotary handle Ammeter module Trip unit Insulation-monitoring module Current-transformer module Sealable terminal shield 84
84 Compact NS100 to 630 (plug-in and withdrawable versions) Sealable terminal shield Voltage-presence indicator Terminal extensions and spreaders Rear connectors Connectors for withdrawable devices One-piece spreader Connectors Plug-in base Interphase barriers Chassis side plate Control-wire connection plate Direct rotary handle Motor-mechanism module Control-wire connection on chassis Circuit-breaker side plate Auxiliary contact Voltage release Extended rotary handle Ammeter module Current-transformer module Trip unit Insulation-monitoring module Sealable terminal shield 85
85 Functions and characteristics Installation, connection and accessories Compact NS100 to 630 Installation Fixed circuit breakers Compact circuit breakers may be mounted vertically, horizontally or flat on their back without any derating of characteristics. They are designed for easy installation in the various types of switchboards of each market and country. Fixed Compact NS50H Installation positions Mounting on a backplate (solid or slotted) Mounting on rails Mounting on DIN rail (with adapter) Mounting on a Prisma functional mounting plate. The plug-in configuration makes it possible to: c Extract and/or rapidly replace the circuit breaker without having to touch connections c Allow for the addition of future circuits at a later date. Circuit breaker on a plug-in base Mounting on a backplate Mounting through a front panel Mounting on rails Compact NS50H on a plug-in base Installation positions Protection against direct contacts with power circuits c Circuit breaker plugged in = IP4 c Circuit breaker removed = IP. c Circuit breaker removed, base equipped with shutters = IP4 Parts of a plug-in configuration c Compact circuit breaker c Set of power connectors added to the circuit breaker c Plug-in base for mounting on a backplate or on rails c Insulating screen, for use when the circuit breaker is installed on a backplate with front connections c Safety trip, installed on the circuit breaker, that causes automatic tripping if the circuit breaker is ON, before engaging or withdrawing it. The safety trip does not prevent circuit breaker operation, even when it has been removed. c Mandatory short terminal shields. Accessories Insulating accessories can be used to: c Protect against direct contact c Increase insulation between phases. 86
86 c Disconnected position - the power circuits are disconnected, but the circuit breaker is still on the chassis and may still be operated (ON, OFF, push-to-trip). c The circuit breaker may be locked using 1 to 3 padlocks (shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm), to prevent connection. c The auxiliaries can be tested (with manual auxiliary connector). Circuit breaker on a withdrawable chassis Connected Disconnected Removed The chassis is made up of two side plates installed on the base and two other plates mounted on the circuit breaker. Accessories c Auxiliary contacts for installation on the fixed part, indicating the connected and disconnected positions c Toggle collar for circuit breakers with a toggle mounted through a front panel, intended to maintain the degree of protection whatever the position of the circuit breaker (supplied with a toggle extension) c Keylock which, depending on the bolt fitted, can be used to: v Prevent insertion for connection v Lock the circuit breaker in the connected or disconnected positions. c Telescopic shaft for extended rotary handles. Compact NS50H on a withdrawable chassis Installation positions Front and rear connections Fixed, plug-in and withdrawable Compact devices may all be equipped with front and rear connections. Fixed device Front connection Rear connection Plug-in and withdrawable devices Front connection Rear connection Rear connection through a backplate 87
87 Functions and characteristics Installation, connection and accessories Compact NS100 to 630 (cont.) Connection of fixed devices Front connection of bars or cables with lugs The Compact NS100 to NS630 devices are equipped as standard with terminals comprising snap-in nuts with screws (M8 for NS100 to 50, M10 for NS400 to 630) for direct connection to insulated bars or cables with lugs. Additional terminal extensions (right-angle, edgewise, spreaders) are available for all connection requirements. Spreaders (5.5 or 70 mm pitch) may be fitted on the Compact NS400 to 630. Lugs Lugs are different for copper and aluminium cables. They are supplied with interphase barriers and are compatible with the long terminal shields. c The small lugs for copper cables may be used for cables with the following cross-sectional areas: v 10, 150 or 185 mm (NS100 to 50) v 40 or 300 mm (NS400 to 630). Crimping by hexagonal barrels or punching. c The small lugs for aluminium cables may be used for cables with the following cross-sectional areas: v 150 or 185 mm (NS100 to 50) v 40 or 300 mm (NS400 to 630). Crimping by hexagonal barrels. Spreaders Spreaders increase the pitch of the terminals. They are not compatible with terminal shields on the Compact NS100 to 50. The one-piece spreader increases the pitch, thus making it possible to use the connection accessories of a larger device (e.g. a Compact NS100 to 50 can be fitted with the accessories of a Compact NS400 to 630). The one-piece spreader also provides protection against direct contact (see page 91). Right-angle terminal extensions Straight terminal extensions for NS100 to 50 Edgewise terminal extensions for NS400 to 630 Small lug for copper cables Small lug for aluminium cables Spreaders One-piece spreader 88
88 Front connection of bare cables Bare-cable connectors for Compact NS devices may be used for both copper and aluminium cables. 1-cable connectors for Compact NS100 to 50 The connectors snap directly on to the device terminals or clip onto right-angle and straight terminal extensions as well as spreaders. 1-cable and -cable connectors for Compact NS400 to 630 The connectors are screwed to device terminals or right-angle terminal extensions. Distribution connectors for Compact NS100 to 50 These connectors are screwed directly to device terminals. Interphase barriers are supplied with distribution connectors, but may be replaced by long terminal shields. Each connector can receive six cables with cross-sectional areas ranging from 1.5 to 35 mm each. Polybloc distribution block for Compact NS100 to 630 The Polybloc connects directly to the device terminals and is used to connect up to six or nine flexible or rigid cables with cross-sectional areas not exceeding 10 mm, to each pole. Connection is made to spring terminals without screws. 1-cable connector for NS100 to 50 1-cable connector for NS400 to 630 -cable connector for NS400 to 630 Distribution connector for NS100 to 50 Polybloc distribution block for NS100 to 50 Rear connection Rear connections for bars or cables with lugs are available in two lengths. Bars may be positioned flat, on edge or at 45 angles depending on how the rear connections are positioned. The rear connections are simply fitted to the device connection terminals. All combinations of rear connection lengths and positions are possible on a given device. The device is mounted on a backplate. For the connection of cables without lugs, the 1-cable connectors for Compact NS100 to 50 may be simply clipped onto the rear connections. Two lengths Four positions Connection of bare cables to NS100 to
89 Functions and characteristics Installation, connection and accessories Compact NS100 to 630 (cont.) Connection of plug-in devices Connection of bars or cables with lugs The plug-in base is equipped with terminals which, depending on their orientation, serve for front and rear connection. For rear connection of a base mounted on a backplate, the terminals must be replaced by insulated, long right-angle terminal extensions. For Compact NS630 devices, connection most often requires the 5.5 or 70 mm pitch spreaders. Connection accessories See the Connection of fixed devices section. Front connection Front connection with spreaders Rear connection Rear connection of a base mounted on a backplate Connection of bare cables All terminals may be equipped with bare-cable connectors. See the Connection of fixed devices section. Plug-in base for Compact NS100 to 50 equipped with 1-cable connectors Plug-in base for Compact NS400 to 630 equipped with -cable connectors 90
90 One-piece spreader One-piece spreader Connection of large cables may require an increase in the distance between the device terminals. The onepiece spreader is an accessory that can also be fitted on Interpact INS switch-disconnectors. It offers the following features: c Increases the pitch of the circuit-breaker terminals to correspond to that of the next largest frame size. c Compatible with all the connection accessories available for the next largest frame size (connectors, terminal extensions, etc.) c Enhances insulation between phases in comparison with standard spreaders. NS100 to 50 NS400 to 630 Pitch without spreaders (mm) Pitch with standard or 70 spreaders (mm) Pitch with one-piece spreader (mm) Mounting When equipped with a one-piece spreader, Compact NS circuit breakers may be installed either at the back of a switchboard or on the front panel with a raiser. c Devices with different frame sizes can thus be aligned in the switchboard c The same mounting plate can be used for all devices (including Interpact INS switch-disconnectors). Connection and insulation accessories are identical to those for Interpact INS switch-disconnectors Mounting at the back of a switchboard Mounting behind the front panel with a raiser 91
91 Functions and characteristics Installation, connection and accessories Compact NS100 to 630 (cont.) Insulation of live parts Terminal shields Terminal shields are sealable insulating accessories used for protection against direct contact with power circuits (degree of protection IP40, IK07). They are supplied with sealing accessories. Compact NS equipped with terminal shields. Terminal-shield selection c Fixed circuit breaker, front connection - long terminal shields c Fixed circuit breaker, rear connection - short terminal shields. c For voltages u 500 V, terminal shields are mandatory. c For voltages > 600 V, special connection kit with terminal shields and insulating screens c For Compact NS400 to 630 with spreaders, special terminal shields for spreaders c For withdrawable circuit breaker (plug-in and chassis type), short terminal shields on the device are mandatory. Terminal shields on the base are possible. Long terminal shields for plug-in bases are used to: c Protect against direct contact with power circuits (degree of protection IP40, IK07) c increase insulation between phases. Insulating accessories for plug-in bases include: c An adapter offering the same connection possibilities as the circuit breaker c Long terminal shields for the plug-in base. Terminal shields Interphase barriers Interphase barriers Safety accessories for maximum insulation at the power-connection points: c They clip easily onto the circuit breaker c Not compatible with terminal shields c Special version for plug-in bases. Rear insulating screens Safety accessories for insulation between connections and the backplate. Compatible with terminal shields or interphase barriers. Rear insulating screens 9
92 OF1 SD SDE OF Connection of electrical auxiliaries MN/M motor mechanism OR rotary handle Fixed configuration Auxiliary circuits exit the device through a knock-out in the front cover. Compact NS100/160/50 SDV OF1 OF OF3 SD SDE Plug-in and withdrawable configurations MN/M motor mechanism OR rotary handle SDV Compact NS400 to 630 Automatic auxiliary connectors Auxiliary circuits exit the circuit breaker via one to three automatic auxiliary connectors (nine wires each). These are made up of: c A moving part, connected to the circuit breaker via a support (one support per circuit breaker) c A fixed part, mounted on the plug-in base, equipped with connectors for bare cables up to.5 mm. Selection of automatic auxiliary connectors. For Compact NS400 to 630, connection wires for the options installed with trip unit STR53UE also exit via the automatic auxiliary connectors. connector 1 OF1 SD MN/M connector OF/SDV SDE/MT MT connector 3 OF3/SDV connector COM connector 1 OF T OF1 SDE/MT SD MT MN/M Compact NS100 to 50 Compact NS400 to 630 Manual auxiliary connector for withdrawable configurations Withdrawable circuit breakers may be equipped with one to three plugs with nine wires each. In disconnected position, the auxiliaries remain connected and can therefore be tested by operating the circuit breaker. Each auxiliary is equipped with a terminal block with numbered terminals for connection of wires up to: c 1.5 mm for auxiliary contacts and voltage releases c.5 mm for the motor-mechanism module. Nine-wire manual auxiliary connector 93
93 Functions and characteristics Installation, connection and accessories Compact NS100 to 630 (cont.) Changeover contacts All the auxiliary contacts opposite are also available in low-level versions capable of switching very low loads (e.g. for the control of PLCs or electronic circuits). Indication contacts Common-point changeover contacts are used to remote circuit-breaker status information and can thus be used for indications, electrical locking, relaying, etc. They comply with the IEC international recommendation. Functions c OF (ON/OFF) - indicates the position of the circuit breaker contacts c SD (trip indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to: v An overload v A short-circuit v An earth-leakage fault v Operation of a voltage release v Operation of the push to trip button v Disconnection when the device is ON. Returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset. c SDE (fault indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to: v An overload v A short-circuit v An earth-leakage fault. Returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset. c SDV (Earth-leakage fault indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to an earth fault. Returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset. c CAM (early-make or early-break function) - indicates the position of the rotary handle. Used in particular for advanced opening of safety trip devices (early break) or to energise a control device prior to circuit-breaker closing (early make). c CE / CD (connected/disconnected position) - microswitch type carriage switches for withdrawable circuit breakers Installation c OF, SD, SDE and SDV functions - a single type of contact provides all these different indication functions, depending on where it is inserted in the device. The contacts clip into slots behind the front cover of the circuit breaker (or the Vigi module for the SDV function). The SDE function on a circuit breaker equipped with a thermal-magnetic trip unit requires the SDE actuator. c CAM function - the contact fits into the rotary-handle unit (direct or extended). c CE / CD (connected/disconnected) function - two parts must be fitted on the fixed and moving parts of the chassis. Electrical characteristics of auxiliary contacts Contacts Standard Low level Rated thermal current (A) 6 5 Minimum load 10 ma at 4 V 1 ma at 4 V Utilisation cat. (IEC ) AC1 AC15 DC1 DC14 AC1 AC15 DC1 DC14 Operational 4 V current (A) 48 V V /40 V V /440 V /690 V
94 Compact NS50L with a direct rotary handle Rotary handles There are two types of rotary handle: c Direct rotary handle c Extended rotary handle. There are two models: c Standard with a black handle c VDE with a red handle and yellow front for machine-tool control. Direct rotary handle Degree of protection IP40, IK07. The direct rotary handle maintains: c Visibility of and access to trip unit settings c Suitability for isolation c Indication of the three positions O (OFF), I (ON) and tripped c Access to the push to trip button c Circuit breaker locking capability in the OFF position by one to three padlocks, shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm (not supplied). It replaces the circuit-breaker front cover. Accessories transform the standard direct rotary handle for the following situations: c Motor control centre (MCC) switchboards: v Door opening disabled when the circuit breaker is ON v Circuit-breaker closing is disabled if the door is open c A higher degree of protection (IP43, IK07) c Machine-tool control, complying with CNOMO E , IP54, IK08. Compact NS50L with an extended rotary handle Extended rotary handle Degree of protection IP 55, IK08. This handle makes it possible to operate circuit breakers installed at the back of switchboards, from the switchboard front. It maintains: c Suitability for isolation c Indication of the three positions O (OFF), I (ON) and tripped c Access to trip unit settings, when the switchboard door is open c Circuit breaker locking capability in the OFF position by one to three padlocks, shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm (not supplied). The door cannot be opened if the circuit breaker is ON or locked. The extended rotary handle is made up of: c A unit that replaces the front cover of the circuit breaker (secured by screws) c An assembly (handle and front plate) on the door that is always secured in the same position, whether the circuit breaker is installed vertically or horizontally c An extension shaft that must be adjusted to the distance. The min/max distance between the back of circuit breaker and door is: v 185 to 600 mm for Compact NS100 to 50 v 10 to 65 mm for Compact NS400 to 630. For withdrawable configurations, the extended rotary handle is also available with a telescopic shaft with two stable positions. 95
95 Functions and characteristics Installation, connection and accessories Compact NS100 to 630 (cont.) M or MN voltage release Remote tripping M or MN voltage releases are used to trip the circuit breaker. MN undervoltage release This release trips the circuit breaker when the control voltage drops below a tripping threshold: c Tripping threshold between 0.35 and 0.7 times the rated voltage c Circuit breaker closing is possible only if the voltage exceeds 0.85 times the rated voltage. Circuit breaker tripping by an MN release meets the requirements of standard IEC Time-delay unit for an MN release Eliminates nuisance tripping due to transient voltage dips lasting 00 ms. It is used in conjunction with: c A 50 V DC MN release, control voltage 0/40 V AC c A 48 V DC MN release, control voltage 48 V AC. M shunt release Trips the circuit breaker when the control voltage rises above 0.7 x Un. Control signals can be of the impulse type (u 0 ms) or maintained. Operation When the circuit breaker has been tripped by an MN or M release, it must be reset locally. MN or M tripping takes priority over manual closing. In the presence of a standing trip order, closing of the contacts, even temporary, is not possible. Mechanical characteristics c Endurance is equal to 50% of the mechanical endurance of the circuit breaker c The releases clip in behind the front cover c Connection using wires up to 1.5 mm, to integrated terminal blocks. Electrical characteristics c Consumption: v Pick-up (M): < 10 VA v Seal-in (MN and MNR): < 5 VA. c Response time: < 50 ms. 96
96 Compact NS50H with motor mechanism compact NS400 H Ui 750V. Uimp 8kV. Ue (V) 0/40 380/ /55 600/690 cat A manu Icu (ka) Ics = 100% Icu IEC 947- UTE VDE BS CEI UNE NEMA In = 400A auto O OFF O push OFF charged I push ON contact position indicator (suitability for isolation) outgoing-circuit identification labels 3 spring status indicator (charged, discharged) 4 locking device (keylock) 5 locking device (OFF position), using 1 to 3 padlocks, shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm, not supplied 6 manual spring-charging lever 7 I (ON) pushbutton 8 O (OFF) pushbutton 9 manual/auto mode selection switch. The position of this switch can be indicated remotely 10 operations counter (Compact NS400/630) 1 Motor-mechanism module When equipped with a motor-mechanism module, Compact NS circuit breakers feature very high mechanical endurance as well as easy and sure operation: c All circuit-breaker indications and information remain visible and accessible, including trip-unit settings and indications; c Suitability for isolation is maintained and padlocking remains possible; c Double insulation of the front face. Applications c Local motor-driven operation, centralised operation, automatic distribution control c Normal/standby source changeover or switching to a replacement source to optimise energy costs c Load shedding and reconnection to optimise energy costs c Synchrocoupling. Automatic operation c Circuit-breaker ON and OFF controlled by two impulse-type or maintained control signals c Automatic spring charging following voluntary tripping (by MN or M), with standard wiring c Mandatory manual reset following tripping due to an electrical fault. Manual operation c Transfer to manual mode using a switch (9) with possibility of remote mode indication c Circuit-breaker ON and OFF controlled by pushbuttons c Recharging of stored-energy system by pumping the lever 9 times c Padlocking in OFF position. Installation and connection All installation (fixed, plug-in/withdrawable) and connection possibilities are maintained. Motor-mechanism module connections are made behind its front cover to integrated terminals, for cables up to.5 mm. Accessories c Keylock for locking in OFF position c Operations counter for the Compact NS400 and NS630, indicating the number of ON and OFF cycles. The counter must be installed on the front of the motormechanism module. Characteristics Motor mechanism MT100 to MT630 Response time (ms) opening < 600 closing < 80 Rate cycles/minute max. 4 Control voltage (V) DC 4/30-48/60 110/ AC 50/60 Hz 48 (50 Hz) - 110/130 0/40-380/440 Consumption (1) DC (W) opening i 500 closing i 500 AC (VA) opening i 500 closing i 500 Electrical endurance Circuit breaker + motor-mechanism module, in thousands of operations (IEC ), at 440 V NS100 NS160 NS50 6 NS400 (1) For NS100/50, motor "vibratory" type consider inrush current as In during 10 ms cycling. 4 NS630 0,1 0, 0,3 0,5 0,7 1 I/In 97
97 Functions and characteristics Installation, connection and accessories Compact NS100 to 630 (cont.) Indications and measurement Voltage presence indicator The indicator detects and indicates that circuit breaker terminals are supplied with power. Installation c In the long or short terminal shields, via the knockouts c Not compatible with the motor-mechanism module c Upstream or downstream of the circuit breaker c Degree of protection IP40, IK04. Electrical characteristics Operates on all networks with voltages ranging from 0 to 550 V AC. Compact NS630L with voltage-presence indicator Current-transformer module This module enables direct connection of a measurement device such as an ammeter or a Digipact power meter (not supplied). Installation c Directly on the downstream circuit-breaker terminals c Degree of protection IP40, IK04 c Class II insulation between front and the power circuits c Connection to 6 integrated connectors for cables up to.5 mm. Electrical characteristics c Transformer with 5 A secondary winding. c Accuracy class 3 for the following output-power consumptions: v Rating 100 A: 1.6 VA v Rating 150 A: 3 VA v Rating 50 A: 5 VA v Rating 400/630A: 8 VA. Compact NS630H with current-transformer module Ammeter and Imax ammeter modules Ammeter module Measures and displays (dial-type ammeter) the current of each phase (selection of phases by 3-position switch in front). Imax ammeter module Measures and displays (dial-type ammeter) the maximum current flowing in the middle phase. The Imax value can be reset on the front. Installation c Identical for both types of ammeter module c Directly on the downstream circuit-breaker terminals c Ammeter clips into module in any of four 90 positions, i.e. can be installed of devices mounted both vertically and horizontally c Degree of protection IP40, IK04 c Class II insulation between front and the power circuits. Electrical characteristics c Ammeter module: accuracy class 4.5 c Imax ammeter module: v Accuracy ± 6 % v Maximum currents are displayed only if they last at least 15 minutes. Compact NS50L with ammeter module 98
98 Insulation-monitoring module This module detects and indicates an insulation drop on a load circuit (TN-S or TT systems). Operation is identical to that of a Vigi module, but without circuit-breaker tripping. Indication by a red LED in front. An auxiliary contact may be installed for remote insulation-drop indications. Installation c Directly on the downstream circuit-breaker terminals c Degree of protection: IP40, IK04 c Double insulation of the front face. Electrical characteristics c Settings: 100, 00, 500 and 1000 ma c Accuracy: % c Time delay following drop: 5 to 10 seconds c AC-system voltage: 00 to 440 V AC and 440 to 550 V AC. Compact NS50H with insulation-monitoring module Communication Communicating versions of the auxiliary contacts and the motor-mechanism module also exist for integration in a Digipact communications system. They simply replace the standard electrical auxiliaries. Using the STR53UE and STR43ME trip units equipped with the COM communications option, it is possible to transmit data to Digipact modules: c Settings c Rms values of phase and neutral currents c Current of the most heavily loaded phase c Overload alarm in progress c Tripping cause (overload, short-circuit, etc.). Compact NS equipped with communicating auxiliary contacts and motor-mechanism module Withdrawable Compact NS equipped with communicating auxiliary contacts 99
99 Functions and characteristics Installation, connection and accessories Compact NS100 to 630 (cont.) Locking systems Locking in the OFF position guarantees isolation as per IEC Padlocking systems can receive up to three padlocks with shackle diameters ranging from 5 to 8 mm (padlocks not supplied). Control device Function Means Required accessories Toggle lock in OFF position padlock removable device lock in OFF or padlock fixed device ON position Direct rotary handle lock in OFF position padlock keylock locking device + keylock MCC rotary handle lock in OFF position padlock Rotary handle lock in OFF position padlock Extended rotary handle lock in OFF position, keylock keylock door opening prevented Motor mechanism lock in OFF position, padlock motor mechanism keylock locking device locked out (keylock incorporated) Locking of the toggle using a removable device Locking of the toggle using a fixed device Locking of the rotary handle using a padlock or a keylock. 100
100 Heavy-duty insulating individual enclosure for Compact NS Individual enclosures Compact NS and Vigicompact NS devices with two, three or four poles may be installed in individual enclosures. All fixed, front connections are possible, except right-angle and edgewise terminal extensions. Spreaders may be installed in the enclosures intended for Interpact Compact and Vigicompact NS50 to 630 devices. There are two models of enclosures: c Heavy-duty metal individual enclosure, with: v Metal enclosure v Door with keylock and cut-out for rotary handle v Direct rotary handle (CNOMO, IP 55, IK 08) v Device mounting plate v Removable plate (without holes) for cable entry through bottom. c Heavy-duty insulating individual enclosure, with: v Insulating enclosure v Transparent cover, screwed, lead sealable, with cut-out for rotary handle v Extended rotary handle v Device mounting plate v Removable plates (without holes) for cable entry through bottom and/or top. Dimensions (W x H x D in mm) c Metal enclosures: v Compact NS100 to 160: 300 x 400 x 00 v Vigicompact NS100 to 160: 400 x 500 x 00 v Compact NS50 to 400: 400 x 600 x 00 v Compact NS630: 600 x 800 x 75 v Vigicompact NS50 to 630: 600 x 800 x 75 c Insulating enclosures: v Compact/Vigicompact NS100 to 160:70 x 360 x 35 v Compact NS50: 70 x 540 x 35 v Compact NS400 to 630: 360 x 70 x 35 v Vigicompact NS50 to 630: 360 x 70 x 35 H W D 101
101 Functions and characteristics Installation, connection and accessories Compact NS100 to 630 (cont.) Escutcheons Escutcheons are an optional feature mounted on the switchboard door. They increase the degree of protection to at least IP40, IK07. Front-panel escutcheons for toggle and Vigi module (NSA160). Secures to the panel, from the front. Toggle cover c degree of protection IP43, IK07 c fits on the front of the circuit breaker. Front-panel escutcheon for rotary handle. Secures to the panel by four screws, from the front. For circuit breaker with motor mechanism and Vigi module, use the protection collar for front panel mounting (see below). Front-panel escutcheons for ammeter module. Secures to the panel by four screws, from the front. Protection collar for toggle and Vigi module on withdrawable devices Protection collars maintain the degree of protection, whatever the position of the device (connected, disconnected). c Front-panel escutcheons are mandatory (same as those for rotary handles and ammeter modules). c Collars are mounted on the device using two screws. c Escutcheons are attached to the switchboard. c A toggle extension is supplied with the collar. For the insulation-monitoring module, use the same elements as for the Vigi module. Front-panel escutcheons for motor mechanism, rotary handles, ammeter modules Same as for fixed devices. 10
102 Outgoing-circuit identification Compact NS100 to 630 devices come with clip-in labels for hand-written indications. It is also possible to use pre-printed Telemecanique labels part number AB1-** : v Compact NS100 to 50: 8 digits v Compact NS400 to 630: 16 digits. Identification accessories Sealing accessories This option includes the elements required to fit lead seals to prevent: c Front removal c Rotary-handle removal c Opening of the motor-mechanism module c Access to auxiliaries c Access to trip-unit settings c Trip-unit removal c Access to earth-leakage protection settings c Terminal-shield removal c Access to power connections. Sealing accessories 103
103 Functions and characteristics Installation, connection and accessories Compact NS630b to 1600 (fixed version) Sealable terminal shield Connection kit for connectors Vertical connection adapter Auxiliary contact Voltage release Manual control with front connection Electrical control with mixed connection Manual control with rear connection Extended rotary handle Direct rotary handle Communications module Connection kit for connectors Sealable terminal shield Escutcheon 104
104 Compact NS630 to 1600 (withdrawable version) Vertical connection adapter Auxiliary contact Voltage release Manual operation Electrical operation Direct rotary handle Communications module Extended rotary handle Escutcheon Transparent cover 105
105 Functions and characteristics Installation, connection and accessories Compact NS630b to 1600 Installation Fixed configuration Compact NS630b to 1600 circuit breakers may be installed vertically, horizontally or flat on their back without any derating of characteristics. Fixed Compact NS800H Mounting on a backplate Mounting on rails The withdrawable configuration makes it possible to: c Extract and/or rapidly replace the circuit breaker without having to touch connections; c Allow for the addition of future circuits at a later date. Withdrawable configuration Compact NS630b to 1600 circuit breakers should be installed vertically only. Mounting on a backplate Rear mounting on rails Withdrawable Compact NS800H Device on mounting plate Device on rails 106
106 The device may be in one of four positions on the chassis: c Connected position. The power circuits and auxiliary contacts are all connected c Test position. The power circuits are disconnected. The auxiliary contacts are still connected and the device can be operated electrically c Disconnected position. The power circuits and auxiliary contacts are all disconnected, however the device is still mounted on the chassis. It can be operated manually (ON, OFF, "push to trip"). c Removed position. All circuits are disconnected. The device simply rests on the chassis rails and can be removed. Connected Test Disconnected Removed The multifunctional chassis for Compact NS630b to 1600 devices is particularly suited for incoming circuit breakers. Features include: c Device connection and disconnection through a door, using a crank that can be stored in the chassis c Three positions (connected, test and disconnected) that are indicated: v Locally by a position indicator v Remotely by carriage switches (3 for the connected position, for the disconnected position and 1 for the test position) c Circuit-breaker ON/OFF commands through a switchboard front panel. Locking There are extensive locking possibilities: c Chassis locking in connected, disconnected and test positions using three padlocks and two keylocks, on the switchboard front panel c Door interlock (inhibits door opening with breaker in connected position) c Racking interlock (inhibits racking with door open) c Locking in each of the connected, disconnected and test positions during device connection or disconnection. Continuation to the next position requires pressing a release button to free the crank. Other safety function Mismatch protection ensures that a circuit breaker is installed only in a chassis with compatible characteristics mismatch protection door interlock 3 racking interlock 4 keylock locking 5 padlock locking 6 position indicator 7 chassis front plate (accessible with cubicle door closed) 8 crank entry 9 reset button 10 crank storage 107
107 Functions and characteristics Installation, connection and accessories Compact NS630b to 1600 (cont.) Compact NS630b to 1600 fixed and withdrawable devices can be connected using: c Horizontal or vertical rear connections c Front connections c Mixed connections c A combination of front and rear connections. Types of connection Front connection Rear connection Horizontal Vertical Simply turn a horizontal rear connector 90 to make it a vertical connector. Combination of front and rear connections Note. Compact circuit breakers can be connected indifferently with bare-copper, tinned-copper and tinned-aluminium conductors, requiring no particular treatment. 108
108 Front connection of fixed devices Bars Fixed, front-connection Compact NS630b to 1600 devices are equipped with terminals comprising captive screws for direct connection of bars. Other connection possibilities for bars include vertical-connection adapters for edgewise bars and spreaders to increase the pole pitch to 95 mm. If the vertical connection adapters are front oriented, then it is mandatory to install the arc chute screen in order to comply with the safety clearances. Vertical-connection adapters Spreaders. Bare cables Special sets of connectors and terminal shields may be used to connect up to four 40 mm copper or aluminium cables for each phase. 4-cable connectors Cables with lugs Cable lug adapters are combined with the vertical-connection adapters. One to four cables with crimped lugs (i 300 mm ) may be connected. To ensure stability, spacers must be positioned between the terminal extensions. If the cable lug adapters are installed over the top of the arc chute chambers, then it is mandatory to install the arc chute screen in order to comply with the safety clearances. Cable lug adapters 109
109 Functions and characteristics Installation, connection and accessories Compact NS630b to 1600 (cont.) Rear connection of fixed devices Bars Fixed, rear-connection Compact NS630b to 1600 devices equipped with horizontal or vertical connectors may be directly connected to flat or edgewise bars, depending on the position of the connectors. Spreaders are available to increase the pole pitch to 95 mm. Spreaders. Cables with lugs Cable lug adapters enable connection of one to four cables with crimped lugs (i 300 mm ). To ensure stability, spacers must be positioned between the terminal extensions. Cable lug adapters 110
110 Front connection of withdrawable devices Bars Withdrawable, front-connection Compact NS630b to 1600 devices are suitable for direct connection of bars. Other connection possibilities for bars include vertical-connection adapters for edgewise bars and spreaders to increase the pole pitch to 95 mm. Vertical-connection adapters Spreaders Cables with lugs Cable lug adapters enable connection of one to four cables with crimped lugs (i 300 mm ). To ensure stability, spacers must be positioned between the terminal extensions. Cable lug adapters 111
111 Functions and characteristics Installation, connection and accessories Compact NS630b to 1600 (cont.) Rear connection of withdrawable devices Bars Withdrawable, rear-connection Compact NS630b to 1600 devices equipped with horizontal or vertical connectors may be directly connected to flat or edge-wise bars, depending on the position of the connectors. Spreaders are available to increase the pole pitch to 95 mm. Spreaders Cables with lugs Cable lug adapters enable connection of one to four cables with crimped lugs (i 300 mm ). To ensure stability, spacers must be positioned between the terminal extensions. Cable lug adapters 11
112 Insulation of live parts Connection shield Mounted on fixed, front-connection devices, this shield insulates power-connection points, particularly when cables with lugs are used Interphase barriers These barriers are flexible insulated partitions used to reinforce isolation of connection points in installations with busbars, whether insulated or not. Barriers are installed vertically between front or rear connection terminals. Connection shield Compact NS equipped with connection shield Interphase barriers for fixed device, front connection Interphase barriers for fixed device, rear connection Interphase barriers for withdrawable device, rear connection Safety shutters Mounted on the chassis, the safety shutters automatically block access to the disconnecting contact cluster when the device is in the disconnected or test positions (degree of protection IP 0). When the device is removed from its chassis, no live parts are accessible. The shutters can be padlocked (padlock not supplied) to: c Prevent connection of the device c Lock the shutters in the closed position. Safety shutters 113
113 Functions and characteristics Installation, connection and accessories Compact NS630b to 1600 (cont.) Connection of electrical auxiliaries COM rotary handle OF1 OF OF3 SD MN or M Fixed devices Connections are made directly to the auxiliaries once the front has been removed. Wires exit the circuit breaker through a knock-out in the top. Manually operated device COM MN ou or M Withdrawable devices Auxiliary circuits are connected to terminal blocks located in the top part of the chassis. The auxiliary terminal block is made up of a fixed and moving part. The two parts are in contact when the device is in the test and connected positions. Electrically operated device Withdrawable device 114
114 OF, SD and SDE changeover contacts All the auxiliary contacts opposite are also available in "low-level" versions capable of switching very low loads (e.g. for the control of PLCs or electronic circuits). Carriage switches for connected (CE), disconnected (CD) and test (CT) positions Indication contacts Contacts installed in the device Changeover contacts are used to remote circuit-breaker status information and can thus be used for indications, electrical locking, relaying, etc. They comply with the IEC international recommendation. Functions c OF (ON/OFF) - indicates the position of the main circuit breaker contacts c SD (trip indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to: v An overload v A short-circuit v An earth-leakage fault. v Operation of a voltage release v Operation of the "push to trip" button v Disconnection when the device is ON. Returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset. c SDE (fault indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to: v An overload v A short-circuit v An earth-leakage fault. Returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset. c CAF / CAO (early-make or early-break function) - indicates the position of the rotary handle. Used in particular for advanced opening of safety trip devices (early break) or to energise a control device prior to circuit-breaker closing (early make). Installation c OF, SD and SDE functions - a single type of contact provides all these different indication functions, depending on where it is inserted in the device. The contacts clip into slots behind the front cover of the circuit breaker. c CAF / CAO function - the contact fits into the rotary-handle unit (direct or extended). Electrical characteristics of the OF/SD/SDE/CAF/CAO auxiliary contacts Contacts Standard Low level Rated thermal current (A) 6 5 Minimum load 10 ma at 4 V 1 ma at 4 V Utilisation cat. (IEC ) AC1 AC15 DC1 DC14 AC1 AC15 DC1 DC14 Operational 4 V current (A) 48 V V /40 V V /440 V /690 V Connected, disconnected, test position carriage switches A single type of changeover contact can be mounted optionally on the chassis to indicate, depending on the slot where it is installed: c The connected (CE) position c The disconnected (CD) position. This position is indicated when the required clearance for isolation of the power and auxiliary circuits is reached c The test (CT) position. In this position, the power circuits are disconnected and the auxiliary circuits are connected. Installation c Contacts for the connected (CE), disconnected (CD) and test (CT) positions clip into the upper front section of the chassis. Electrical characteristics of the CE/CD/CT auxiliary contacts Contacts Standard Low level Rated thermal current (A) 8 5 Minimum load 10 ma at 4 V 1 ma at 4 V Utilisation cat. (IEC ) AC1 AC15 DC1 DC14 AC1 AC15 DC1 DC14 Operational 4 V current (A) 48 V V /40 V V /440 V /690 V
115 Functions and characteristics Installation, connection and accessories Compact NS630b to 1600 (cont.) Compact NS with a direct rotary handle Rotary handles There are two types of rotary handle: c Direct rotary handle c Extended rotary handle. There are two models: c Standard with a black handle c VDE with a red handle and yellow front for machine-tool control. Direct rotary handle Degree of protection IP 40, IK 07. The direct rotary handle maintains: c Visibility of and access to trip unit settings c Suitability for isolation c Indication of the three positions O (OFF), I (ON) and tripped c Access to the "push to trip" button c Circuit breaker locking capability in the OFF position by one to three padlocks, shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm (not supplied). It replaces the circuit-breaker front cover. Accessories transform the standard direct rotary handle for the following situations: c Motor control centre (MCC) switchboards: v Door opening disabled when the circuit breaker is ON; v Circuit-breaker closing is disabled if the door is open; c A higher degree of protection (IP 43, IK 07) c Machine-tool control, complying with CNOMO E , IP 54, IK 07. Compact NS with an extended rotary handle Extended rotary handle Degree of protection IP 55, IK 07. This handle makes it possible to operate circuit breakers installed at the back of switchboards, from the switchboard front. It maintains: c Suitability for isolation c Indication of the three positions O (OFF), I (ON) and tripped c Access to trip unit settings, when the switchboard door is open c Circuit breaker locking capability in the OFF position by one to three padlocks, shackle diameter 5 to 8 mm (not supplied). The door cannot be opened if the circuit breaker is ON or locked. The extended rotary handle is made up of: c A unit that replaces the front cover of the circuit breaker (secured by screws) c An assembly (handle and front plate) on the door that is always secured in the same position, whether the circuit breaker is installed vertically or horizontally. c An extension shaft that must be adjusted to the distance. The min/max distance between the back of circuit breaker and door is 18/605 mm. 116
116 Manually operated circuit breakers may be equipped with an M shunt release, an MN undervoltage release or a delayed undervoltage release (MN + delay unit). Electrically operated circuit breakers are equipped as standard with a remote operating mechanism to remotely open or close the circuit breaker. An M shunt release or an MN undervoltage release (instantaneous or delayed) may be added. M voltage release Remote tripping This function opens the circuit breaker via an electrical order. It is made up of a shunt release (M), or an undervoltage release (MN) or a delayed undervoltage release (MN + delay unit). The delay unit, installed outside the circuit breaker, may be disabled by an emergency power OFF button to obtain instantaneous opening of the circuit breaker. Wiring diagram for the remote-tripping function opening order opening order ordre de déclenchement retardé retardateur C D ordre de déclenchement instantané D M MN MN C1 D1 D1 Voltage releases (M) When energised, the M voltage release instantaneously opens the circuit breaker. A continuous supply of power to the M locks the circuit breaker in the OFF position. Characteristics Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz 4/30-48/60-100/130-00/50-40/77-380/ /550 V DC 1-4/30-48/60-100/130-00/50 Operating threshold 0.7 to 1.1 Un Continuous locking function 0.85 to 1.1 Un Consumption (VA or W) pick-up: 00 hold: 4.5 Circuit-breaker response 50 ms±10 time at Un Instantaneous voltage releases (MN) The MN release instantaneously opens the circuit breaker when its supply voltage drops to a value between 35% and 70% of its rated voltage. If the release is not supplied, it is impossible to close the circuit breaker, either manually or electrically. Any attempt to close the circuit breaker has no effect on the main contacts. Circuitbreaker closing is enabled again when the supply voltage of the release returns to 85% of its rated value. Characteristics Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz 4/30-48/60-100/130-00/50-380/ /550 V DC 4/30-48/60-100/130-00/50 Operating opening 0.35 to 0.7 Un threshold closing 0.85 Un Consumption (VA or W) pick-up: 00 - hold: 4.5 Circuit-breaker response 90 ms±5 time at Un MN delay units To eliminate circuit-breaker nuisance tripping during short voltage dips, operation of the MN release can be delayed. This function is achieved by adding an external delay unit in the MN voltage-release circuit. Two versions are available, adjustable and non-adjustable. Characteristics Power supply non-adjustable 100/130-00/50 V AC 50/60 Hz /DC adjustable 48/60-100/130-00/50-380/480 Operating threshold opening 0.35 to 0.7 Un closing 0.85 Un Consumption (VA or W) pick-up: 00 - hold: 4.5 Circuit-breaker response adjustable 0.5s - 0.9s - 1.5s - 3s time at Un non-adjustable 0.5s 117
117 Functions and characteristics Installation, connection and accessories Compact NS630b to 1600 (cont.) Electrically operated circuit breakers are equipped as standard with a motor mechanism module. Two solutions are available for electrical operation: c An analogue solution c A digital solution with the COM communication option. Electrically operated circuit breaker The motor mechanism module is used to remotely open and close the circuit breaker. It is made up of a spring-charging motor equipped with an opening release and a closing release. An electrical operation function is generally combined with: c Device ON/OFF indication (OF) c "Fault-trip" indication (SDE). Wiring diagram of an analogue electrical operation solution opening order A4 closing order A B4 fault 8 84 open 1 14 closed electrical operation SDE OF1 A Electrically operated Compact NS circuit breaker Wiring diagram of a digital electrical operation solution opening order A4 closing order A B4 remote-operating mechanism A1 COM OF supervisor SDE In the event of simultaneous opening and closing orders, the mechanism discharges without any movement of the main contacts. In the event of maintained opening and closing orders, the standard electrical operation solution provides an antipumping function by blocking the main contacts in open position. 118
118 Spring-charging motor Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz 48/60-100/130-00/ / / V DC 4/30-48/60-100/15-00/50 Operating threshold 0.85 to 1.1 Un Consumption (VA or W) 180 Motor overcurrent to 3 In for 0.1 second Charging time maximum 4 seconds Operating frequency maximum 3 cycles per minute Electrical closing order The release remotely closes the circuit breaker if the spring mechanism is charged. Release electrical characteristics are identical to those of an M release (see above), except that the operating threshold is from 0.85 to 1.1 Un and the circuit-breaker response time at Un is 60 ms ± 10. The Compact NS electrical operation function can be used to implement a synchro-coupling system. Electrical opening order The release instantaneously opens the circuit breaker when energised. The supply can be maintained or automatically disconnected. Release electrical characteristics are identical to those of an M release (see above). 119
119 Functions and characteristics Installation, connection and accessories Compact NS630b to 1600 (cont.) Toggle locked by removable padlocking device Rotary handle locked by a keylock Locking on manually operated devices Locking in the OFF position guarantees isolation as per IEC Padlocking systems can receive up to three padlocks with shackle diameters ranging from 5 to 8 mm (padlocks not supplied). Control device Function Means Required accessories Toggle lock in OFF position padlock removable device lock in OFF or ON padlock fixed device position Direct rotary handle lock in padlock c OFF position keylock locking c OFF or ON position device + keylock CNOMO direct rotary handle lock in padlock c OFF position keylock locking c OFF or ON position device + keylock Extended rotary handle lock in OFF position, padlock door opening prevented keylock keylock Locking in ON position does not prevent the device from tripping in the event of a fault or remote tripping order. 10
120 Access to pushbuttons protected by transparent cover Pushbutton locking using a padlock Locking on electrically operated devices reset of mechanical trip indicator OFF pushbutton 3 OFF position locking 4 ON pushbutton 5 springs charged indication 6 pushbutton locking 7 contact position indication 8 operation counter OFF position locking using padlocks Pushbutton locking The transparent cover blocks access to the pushbuttons used to open and close the device. It is possible to independently lock the opening OFF button and the closing ON button. The pushbuttons may be locked using either: c Three padlocks (not supplied) c Lead seal c Two screws. OFF position locking using a keylock and padlocks Device locking in the OFF position The circuit breaker is locked in the OFF position by physically maintaining the opening pushbutton pressed down: c Using padlocks (one to three padlocks, not supplied) c Using a keylock (supplied). Keys may be removed only when locking is effective (Profalux or Ronis type locks). The keylocks are available in any of the following configurations: c One keylock c One keylock mounted on the device + one identical keylock supplied separately for interlocking with another device. A locking kit (without lock) is available for installation of a keylock (Ronis, Profalux, Kirk or Castell). 11
121 Functions and characteristics Installation, connection and accessories Compact NS630b to 1600 (cont.) Chassis locking mismatch protection door interlock 3 racking interlock 4 keylock locking 5 padlock locking 6 position indicator 7 chassis front plate (accessible with cubicle door closed) 8 crank entry 9 reset button 10 crank storage 10 Disconnected position locking by padlocks Disconnected position locking by keylocks Door interlock Disconnected position locking Mounted on the chassis and accessible with the door closed, these devices lock the circuit breaker in the disconnected position in two manners: c Using padlocks (standard), up to three padlocks (not supplied) c Using keylocks (optional), one or two different keylocks are available. Profalux and Ronis keylocks are available in different options: c One keylock c One keylock mounted on the device + one identical keylock supplied separately, using the same key, for interlocking with another device c One (or two) keylocks mounted on the device + one (or two) identical keylocks supplied separately, for interlocking with another device. A locking kit (without locks) is available for installation of one or two keylocks (Ronis, Profalux, Kirk or Castell). Connected, disconnected and test position locking The connected, disconnected and test positions are shown by an indicator. The racking crank blocks when the exact position is obtained. A release button is used to free it. On request, the disconnected position locking system may be modified to lock the circuit breaker in any of the three positions, connected, disconnected and test. Racking interlock Door interlock Mounted on the right or left-hand side of the chassis, this device inhibits opening of the cubicle door when the circuit breaker is in connected or test position. It the breaker is put in the connected position with the door open, the door may be closed without having to disconnect the circuit breaker. Racking interlock This device prevents insertion of the crank when the cubicle door is open (device cannot be connected). Mismatch protection Mismatch protection Mismatch protection ensures that a circuit breaker is installed only in a chassis with compatible characteristics. It is made up of two parts (one on the chassis and one on the circuit breaker) offering twenty different combinations that the user may select. 1
122 Auxiliary terminal shield Other accessories Auxiliary terminal shield (CB) Optional equipment mounted on the chassis, the shield prevents access to the terminal block of the electrical auxiliaries. Operation counter Operation counter (CDM) The operation counter sums the number of operating cycles and is visible on the front panel. It is compatible with electrically operated devices. Escutcheon (CDP) Optional equipment mounted on the door of the cubicle, the escutcheon increases the degree of protection to IP 40. It is available in fixed and withdrawable versions. Escutcheon Transparent cover (CCP) for escutcheon Optional equipment mounted on the escutcheon, the cover is hinged and secured by a screw. It increases the degree of protection to IP 54 and the degree of protection against mechanical impacts to IK 10. It may be used for withdrawable devices only. Transparent cover Blanking plate (OP) for escutcheon Used with the escutcheon, this option closes off the door cutout of a cubicle not yet equipped with a device. It may be used with the escutcheon for both fixed and withdrawable devices. Blanking plate 13
123 Functions and characteristics Installation, connection and accessories Compact NS1600b to 300 (fixed version) Availability to be announced Vertical-connection adapters Circuit breaker NS1600b / 500A Circuit breaker NS300 Auxiliary contact Voltage release Communication module 14
124 Installation Fixed circuit breakers Compact NS1600b to 300 circuit breakers should be installed vertically only. Fixed Compact NS Mounting on rails Connection Front connection NS1600 to 500 NS300 Bars Bars may be directly connected to the terminals of Compact NS1600b to 300 circuit breakers. NS1600b to 500 NS1600b to 500 with connection for vertical-connection adapters or NS300 15
125 Functions and characteristics Installation, connection and accessories Compact NS1600b to 300 (cont.) OF, SD and SDE changeover contacts All the auxiliary contacts opposite are also available in "low-level" versions capable of switching very low loads (e.g. for the control of PLCs or electronic circuits). Indication contacts Contacts installed in the device Changeover contacts are used to remote circuit-breaker status information and can thus be used for indications, electrical locking, relaying, etc. They comply with the IEC international recommendation. Functions c OF (ON/OFF) - indicates the position of the main circuit breaker contacts c SD (trip indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to: v An overload v A short-circuit v An earth-leakage fault v Operation of a voltage release v Operation of the "push to trip" button Returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset. c SDE (fault indication) - indicates that the circuit breaker has tripped due to: v An overload v A short-circuit v An earth-leakage fault. Returns to de-energised state when the circuit breaker is reset. Installation c OF, SD and SDE functions - a single type of contact provides all these different indication functions, depending on the position where it is inserted in the device. The contacts clip into slots behind the front cover of the circuit breaker. Electrical characteristics of the OF/SD/SDE auxiliary contacts Contacts Standard Low level Rated thermal current (A) 6 5 Minimum load 10 ma at 4 V 1 ma at 4 V Utilisation category (IEC ) AC1 AC15 DC1 DC14 AC1 AC15 DC1 DC14 Operational 4 V current (A) 48 V V /40 V V /440 V /690 V
126 Compact NS1600b to 300 circuit breakers may be equipped with an M shunt release, an MN undervoltage release or a delayed undervoltage release (MN + delay unit). M voltage release Remote tripping This function opens the circuit breaker via an electrical order. It is made up of a shunt release (M), or an undervoltage release (MN) or a delayed undervoltage release (MN + delay unit). The delay unit, installed outside the circuit breaker, may be disabled by an emergency power OFF button to obtain instantaneous opening of the circuit breaker. Wiring diagram for the remote-tripping function opening order opening order ordre de déclenchement retardé retardateur C D ordre de déclenchement instantané D M MN MN C1 D1 D1 Voltage releases (M) When energised, the M voltage release instantaneously opens the circuit breaker. A continuous supply of power to the M locks the circuit breaker in the OFF position. Characteristics Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz 4/30-48/60-100/130-00/50-40/77-380/ /550 V DC 1-4/30-48/60-100/130-00/50 Operating threshold 0.7 to 1.1 Un Continuous locking function 0.85 to 1.1 Un Consumption (VA or W) pick-up: 00 hold: 4.5 Circuit-breaker response 50 ms±10 time at Un Instantaneous voltage releases (MN) The MN release instantaneously opens the circuit breaker when its supply voltage drops to a value between 35% and 70% of its rated voltage. If the release is not supplied, it is impossible to close the circuit breaker, either manually or electrically. Any attempt to close the circuit breaker has no effect on the main contacts. Circuit-breaker closing is enabled again when the supply voltage of the release returns to 85% of its rated value. Characteristics Power supply V AC 50/60 Hz 4/30-48/60-100/130-00/50-380/ /550 V DC 4/30-48/60-100/130-00/50 Operating opening 0.35 to 0.7 Un threshold closing 0.85 Un Consumption (VA or W) pick-up: 00 - hold: 4.5 Circuit-breaker response 90 ms±5 time at Un MN delay units To eliminate circuit-breaker nuisance tripping during short voltage dips, operation of the MN release can be delayed. This function is achieved by adding an external delay unit in the MN voltage-release circuit. Two versions are available, adjustable and non-adjustable. Characteristics Power supply non-adjustable 100/130-00/50 V AC 50/60 Hz /DC adjustable 48/60-100/130-00/50-380/480 Operating threshold opening 0.35 to 0.7 Un closing 0.85 Un Consumption (VA or W) pick-up: 00 - hold: 4.5 Circuit-breaker response adjustable 0.5s - 0.9s - 1.5s - 3s time at Un non-adjustable 0.5s 17
127 Functions and characteristics Installation, connection and accessories Compact NS1600b to 300 (cont.) Device locking Locking in the OFF position guarantees isolation as per IEC Padlocking systems can receive up to three padlocks with shackle diameters ranging from 5 to 8 mm (padlocks not supplied). Control device Function Means Required accessories Toggle lock in OFF position padlock removable device lock in OFF or ON padlock fixed device position Compact NS with toggle locked using a fixed device and padlocks Compact NS with toggle locked using a removable device and padlocks 18
128 Test equipment Compact NS100 to 630 test equipment for STR electronic trip units Mini test kit Portable test kit Mini test kit The mini test kit is a portable unit requiring no external power supply, used to check operation of the electronic trip unit and circuit-breaker tripping. It connects to the test connector on the front of the circuit breaker. Required power source: five 9 V alkaline batteries (not supplied). Portable test kit The portable test kit is used to check all aspects of the protection functions: c Long time protection c Short time protection c Instantaneous protection c Earth-fault protection. Required power source: 110 or 0 V AC, 50/60 Hz. Compact NS630b to 300 test equipment for Micrologic control units Mini test kit The autonomous hand-held mini test kit may be used to: c Check operation of the control unit and the tripping and pole-opening system by sending a signal simulating a short-circuit c Supply power to the control units for settings via the keypad when the circuit-breaker is open (Micrologic P and H control units). Required power source: standard LR6-AA battery. Portable test kit The portable test kit is available in two versions: c The autonomous version with built-in keypad and display c The complete version controlled by a PC. Portable test kit The autonomous version may be used to check: c The mechanical operation of the circuit breaker c The electrical continuity of the connection between the circuit breaker and the control unit c Operation of the control unit: v Display of settings v Operating tests on the ASIC electronic component v Automatic and manual tests on protection functions v Test on the zone-selective interlocking (ZSI) function v Inhibition of the earth-fault protection v Inhibition of the thermal memory. The complete version controlled by a PC offers in addition: c Comparison of the real tripping curve with the catalogue curves available on the PC c Reset of the MC / M6C contacts and indications c Reading and modification of settings and counters c Reading of histories and logs c Waveform capture c Analysis of harmonics. Note. These test kits are identical for all Compact NS630b to 300 circuit breakers and all Masterpact NW circuit breakers. 19
129 3 130
130 Compact NS Installation recommendations Presentation 8 Functions and characteristics 16 Operating conditions 13 Installation in switchboards Power supply and weights 133 Safety clearances and minimum distances 134 Installation example 136 Door interlock for Compact NS630b to Connection of MN and M voltage releases 138 for Compact NS630b to 300 Power connections for Compact NS80H-MA 139 NSC100N Power connections for Compact NS100 to 630 Connection of insulated bars or cables with lugs 140 Connection of bare cables 141 Insulation of live parts 14 Power connections for Compact NS630b to Sizing of bars 145 Recommended drilling dimensions 147 Temperature derating 150 Power dissipation / Resistance 15 3 Dimensions 155 Connection 193 Electrical diagrams 09 Additional characteristics 37 Catalogue numbers 51 More information about Schneider Electric 9 131
131 Installation recommendations Operating conditions 3 Altitude derating Altitude does not significantly affect circuit-breaker characteristics up to 000 m. Above this altitude, it is necessary to take into account the decrease in the dielectric strength and cooling capacity of air. The following table gives the corrections to be applied for altitudes above 000 metres. The breaking capacities remain unchanged. Compact NS80 to 630 Altitude (m) Dielectric resistance voltage (V) Average insulation level (V) Maximum utilisation voltage (V) Average thermal current (A) at 40 C 1 x In 0.96 x In 0.93 x In 0.9 x In Compact NS630b to 300 Altitude (m) Dielectric resistance voltage (V) Average insulation level (V) Maximum utilisation voltage (V) Average thermal current (A) at 40 C 1 x In 0.99 x In 0.96 x In 0.94 x In Vibrations Compact NS devices resist electromagnetic or mechanical vibrations. Tests are carried out in compliance with standard IEC for the levels required by merchant-marine inspection organisations (Veritas, Lloyd s, etc.): c 13. Hz: amplitude ± 1 mm c Hz: constant acceleration 0.7 g. Excessive vibration may cause tripping, breaks in connections or damage to mechanical parts. Electromagnetic disturbances Compact NS devices are protected against: c Overvoltages caused by devices that generate electromagnetic disturbances c Overvoltages caused by an atmospheric disturbances or by a distributionsystem outage (e.g. failure of a lighting system) c Devices emitting radio waves (radios, walkie-talkies, radar, etc.) c Electrostatic discharges produced by users. Compact NS devices have successfully passed the electromagnetic-compatibility tests (EMC) defined by the following international standards: c IEC , appendix F c IEC , appendix B (trip units with Vigi earth-leakage function). The above tests guarantee that: c No nuisance tripping occurs c Tripping times are respected. 13
132 Installation in switchboards Power supply and weights Power supply Compact NS circuit breakers can be supplied from either the top or the bottom without any reduction in performance. This capability facilitates connection when installed in a switchboard. Weights Circuit breaker Plug-in Chassis Vigi module Positive contact Motor-mechanism base indication (Interpact INV) module NS80H-MA 3P/3D 1.09 NSC100N 3P/3D P/4D NS100N/H 1P/1D 0.5 P/D 1.45 NS100N 3P/D NS100N/H/L 3P/3D P/4D NS160N/H 1P/1D 0.5 P/D 1.45 NS160N 3P/D NS160N/H/L 3P/3D P/4D NS50N 3P/D NS50N/H/L 3P/3D P/4D NS400/630N/H/L 3P/3D P/4D NS630b to P manual operation 4P NS630b to P electrical operation 4P 18 1 NS1600b to 300 3P 4 4P 36 3 The table above presents the weights (in kg) of the circuit breakers and the main accessories, which must be summed to obtain the total weight of complete configurations. 133
133 Installation recommendations Installation in switchboards Safety clearances and minimum distances Compact NS80 to 630 When installing a circuit breaker, minimum distances (safety clearances) must be maintained between the device and panels, bars and other protection devices installed nearby. These distances, which depend on the ultimate breaking capacity, are defined by tests carried out in accordance with standard IEC If installation conformity is not checked by type tests, it is also necessary to: c Use insulated bars for circuit-breaker connections c Block off the busbars using insulating screens. For Compact NS80 to 630 devices, terminal shields, interphase barriers and the insulation kit are recommended and may be mandatory depending on the utilisation voltage and the type of installation (fixed, withdrawable). (See page 14.) Minimal distance between two adjacent circuit breakers 3 Minimal distance between the circuit breaker and top, bottom or side panels Minimal distance between the circuit breaker and front or rear panels D1 front panel F if F < 8 mm : an insulating screen is mandatory D C1 C bare or painted sheetmetal; insulation or insulated bars B F Dimensions (mm) Insulation, insulated bars Bare sheetmetal or painted sheetmetal Compact circuit breaker C1 D1 D C D1 D A1 () A (3) B NS80H-MA U i 440 V NSC100N U < 600 V (1) U u 600 V (1) NS U i 440 V U < 600 V (1) U u 600 V (1) NS U i 440 V U < 600 V (1) U u 600 V (1) (1) Distance must be doubled with interphase barriers. () For Compact NS with long or short terminal shields. (3) For Compact NS without terminal shields. The mandatory distances when installing Compact NS circuit breakers are calculated from the device case, not taking into account the terminal shields or the interphase barriers. 134
134 Fixed Compact NS V AC, front connection Power supply from the top or bottom. Connection by cables or busbars. insulation 40 F 30 side panel insulating kit B = 0 40 Insulating kit is standard. F bare or painted sheetmetal; insulation or insulated bars Connection using cables with lugs or busbars, F = 100. Connection using bare cables, F = Compact NS630b to 300 (fixed devices) A (*) B A (*) B 146,5 F An overhead clearance of 50 mm is required to remove the arc chutes. Insulated parts Metal parts Live parts NS630b to 1600 A B NS1600b to 500 A B NS300 A B Compact NS630b to 1600 (withdrawable devices) A B C C B F Insulated parts Metal parts Live parts A B C F Datum 135
135 Installation recommendations Installation in switchboards Installation example painted sheetmetal A A A A 3 Direct connection by bare cables, devices with terminal shields. Connection by cables with lugs, devices with terminal shields. Connection by insulated bars, devices with terminal shields. Rear connection or plug-in base, devices with terminal shields. Minimum dimensions (mm) Compact circuit breaker NS80H-MA/NSC100N 0 NS NS630b NS1600b A 136
136 Door interlock for Compact NS630b to 1600 Mounted on the left or right-hand side of the chassis, this locking device prevents opening of the door if the circuit breaker is in the connected or test positions. If the circuit breaker was connected with the door open, the door may be closed without having to disconnect the circuit breaker. Y 4 61 (1) () 11 Dimensions (mm) Type (1) () NS630b to 1600 (3P) NS630b to 1600 (4P) Device in the connected or test positions Door locked 3 porte F 5 3 Device in the disconnected position Door not locked Note. The door interlock may be mounted on either the left or right-hand side of the chassis. F Datum 137
137 Installation recommendations Connection of MN and M voltage releases for Compact NS630b to 300 Release wiring During pick-up, the power drawn is approximately 150 to 00 VA. For low supply voltages (1, 4, 48 V), the maximum cable length therefore depends on the supply voltage and the size of the cables. Indicative values for maximum wire lengths (in metres) 1 V 4 V 48 V.5 mm 1.5 mm.5 mm 1.5 mm.5 mm 1.5 mm MN 100 % U source % U source M 100 % U source % U source Note. The lengths mentioned are for each of the two supply wires
138 Power connections for Compact NS80H-MA, NSC100N S L Standard With distribution device connector L (mm) 18 i 10 S (mm ) Cu / Al 1.5 to 70 rigid 1.5 to 16 rigid 1.5 to 50 flexible 1.5 to 10 flexible (1) Tightening 5 torque (Nm) (1) For flexible cables from 1.5 to 4 mm, connection with crimped or self-crimping ferrule. Distribution connector 3 139
139 3 Installation recommendations NS100 to 50 Spreader Separate parts Tinned copper Where U > 600 V, the mandatory insulation kit means separate spreaders cannot be used. The one-piece spreader must be used. Straight terminal extensions Tinned copper. One-piece spreader Right-angle terminal extensions Tinned copper. Upstream side. NS400 and 600 Separate spreaders with 5.5 and 70 mm pole pitches Tinned copper Where U > 600 V, use of the 5.5 mm spreaders requires a specific insulation kit. The 70 mm spreaders may not be used. Edgewise terminal extension Tinned copper Right-angle terminal extensions Tinned copper Upstream side Power connections for Compact NS100 to 630 Connection of insulated bars or cables with lugs NS100 NS160/50 NS400/630 Bars L (mm) i 5 i 5 i 3 I (mm) d + 10 d + 10 d + 15 d (mm) i 10 i 10 i Ø e (mm) i 6 i 6 3 i e i 10 Ø (mm) d l L L e Lugs L (mm) i 5 i 5 i 3 Ø (mm) Tightening torque (Nm) (1) Tightening torque (Nm) () (1) Tightening torque for lugs or bars on the circuit breaker () Tightening torque for rear connections or terminal extensions on plug-in base Connections with accessories NS100 to 50 Pole pitch Without spreaders With spreaders 35 mm 45 mm Dimensions With spreaders or terminal extensions NS100 NS160/50 Bars L (mm) i 5 i 5 l (mm) 0 i I i 5 0 i I i Ø d (mm) i 10 i 10 e (mm) i 6 i 6 d Ø (mm) l Lugs L (mm) i 5 i 5 L L Ø (mm) e Tighten. (Nm) 10 (1), 5 () 15 (1), 5 () torque (1) Tightening torque for spreaders or terminal extensions on the circuit breaker () Tightening torque for spreaders or terminal extensions on plug-in base Spreaders, straight and right-angle terminal extensions are supplied with flexible interphase barriers. NS400 and 630 Pole pitch Without spreaders With spreaders 45 mm 5.5 ou 70 mm Dimensions With spreaders With terminal extensions Bars L (mm) i 40 i 3 l (mm) d i I i 34 d (mm) i 0 i 15 Ø 400 e (mm) 3 i e i 10 3 i e i 10 Ø (mm) 1,5 10,5 d l Lugs L (mm) i 40 i 3 L L Ø (mm) 1,5 10,5 e Tighten. (Nm) 50 (1), 0 () 50 (1), 0 () torque (1) Tightening torque for spreaders or terminal extensions on the circuit breaker () Tightening torque for spreaders or terminal extensions on plug-in base Spreaders, straight and right-angle terminal extensions are supplied with flexible interphase barriers. Close-up view of two cables with lugs. 140
140 Connection of bare cables NS100 to 50 1-cable connector Distribution connector Polybloc distribution block S L 1-cable connector Steel Aluminium i 160A i 50A L (mm) 0 0 S (mm ) Cu / Al 1.5 to 95 (1) Tightening torque (Nm) cable distribution connector (copper or aluminium) L (mm) 15 or 30 S (mm ) Cu / Al 1.5 to 6 (1) 8 to 35 Tightening torque (Nm) 4 6 Polybloc distribution block (6 or 9 cables) L (mm) 1 S (mm ) Cu / Al 1.5 to 10 (1) For flexible cables from 1.5 to 4 mm, connection with crimped or self-crimping ferrule. 3 NS400 and cable connector -cable connector L 1-cable connector -cable connector 1 cable cables L (mm) 0 30 or 60 S (mm ) Cu / Al 35 to 300 x 85 to x 40 rigid / flexible rigid / flexible Tightening torque (Nm) S 141
141 Installation recommendations Power connections for Compact NS100 to 630 (cont.) Insulation of live parts 3 Fixed Compact NS, front connections NS100/50N/H/L NS400/630N/H NS400/630L U < 500 V Interphase barriers Interphase barriers or long terminal or long terminal shields recommended. shields recommended. Insulated bars Insulated bars are mandatory. are mandatory. 500 V i U i 600 V Interphase barriers Interphase barriers Interphase barriers or long terminal or long terminal or long terminal shields are shields are shields are mandatory. mandatory. mandatory. Insulated bars Insulated bars Insulated bars are mandatory. are mandatory. are mandatory. U > 600 V Insulation kit Insulation kit Insulation kit and insulated bars and insulated bars and insulated bars are mandatory. are mandatory. are mandatory. The insulation kit is not compatible with: c separate spreaders for Compact NS100 to 50. The one-piece spreader must be used c separate spreaders (70 mm) for Compact NS400 and 630. For the 5.5 mm spreaders, there is a specific insulation kit. Fixed Compact NS, rear connections NS100/50N/H/L NS400/630N/H NS400/630L All voltage levels Short terminal shields Short terminal shields Short terminal shields recommended. recommended. recommended. Withdrawable Compact NS, front and rear connections NS100/50N/H/L NS400/630N/H NS400/630L All voltage levels Short terminal shields Short terminal shields Short terminal shields are mandatory. are mandatory. are mandatory. Insulated bars Insulated bars Insulated bars are mandatory. are mandatory are mandatory. for U u 500 V. Use of an insulating screen (supplied with the plug-in base) is mandatory. 14
142 Power connections for Compact NS630b to 300 Conductor materials and electrodynamic stresses Compact circuit breakers can be connected with bare-copper, tinned-copper and tinned-aluminium conductors (flexible or rigid bars, cables. In the event of a short-circuit, thermal and electrodynamic stresses will be exerted on the conductors. They must therefore be correctly sized and maintained in place using supports. Electrical connection points on all types of devices (switch-disconnectors, contactors, circuit breakers, etc.) should not be used for mechanical support. Ties for flexible bars and cables The table below indicates the maximum distance between ties depending on the prospective short-circuit current. The maximum distance between ties attached to the switchboard frame is 400 mm. Type of tie Width: 4.5 mm Width: 9 mm Maximum load: kg Maximum load: 90 kg Maximum distance between ties (mm) (double ties) Short-circuit current (ka rms) Note. For cables u 50 mm, use 9 mm-wide ties. 3 Connection of bars Bars must be adjusted to ensure correct positioning on the terminals before bolting (B) Bars must rest on a support firmly attached to the switchboard frame, such that the circuit-breaker terminals do not bear any weight (C). Electrodynamic forces The first spacer between bars must be positioned within a maximum distance (see table below) of the connection point to the circuit breaker. This distance is calculated to resist the electrodynamic stresses exerted between the bars of each phase during a short-circuit. Maximum distance A between the circuit-breaker connection and the first spacer between bars, depending on the short-circuit current Isc (ka) Distance (mm)
143 Installation recommendations Power connections for Compact NS630b to 300 Connections The quality of bar connections depends, among other things, on the tightening torques used for the nuts and bolts. Over-tightening may have the same consequences as under-tightening. The correct tightening torques for the connection of bars to the circuit-breaker terminals are indicated in the table below. The values below are for copper bars (Cu ETP-NFA51-100) and steel nuts and bolts (class 8.8). The same values apply to AGS-T5 quality aluminium bars (French standard NFA and American National Standard H-35-1). Examples of bar connections 3 1 terminal screws, factory tightened to 13 Nm circuit-breaker terminal 3 bars 4 bolt 5 washer 6 nut Tightening torque for bars Rated diameter (mm) Drilling (mm) Tightening torque (Nm) Tightening torque (Nm) diameter with flat or grower with contact or split washers washers Bar drilling Examples Insulation distance Dimensions (mm) Utilisation voltage Ui i 600 V Ui i 1000 V minimum 8 mm 14 mm Bar bending Bars must be bent according to the table below. A tighter bend may cause cracks. Dimensions (mm) e radius r Minimum Recommended to 0 144
144 Sizing of bars The following tables are based on the following assumptions: c Maximum permissible temperature of bars is 100 C c Ti: temperature around the circuit breaker and its connections c Busbars made of copper and not painted. Note. The values presented in the tables are the result of trials and theoretical calculations on the basis of the assumptions mentioned above. These tables are intended as an aid in designing connections, however, the actual values must be confirmed by tests on the installation. Front or horizontal rear connections 3 Compact Maximum Ti : 40 C Ti : 50 C Ti : 60 C service Number of bars Number of bars Number of bars current 5 mm thick 10 mm thick 5 mm thick 10 mm thick 5 mm thick 10 mm thick NS630b 400 b.30 x 5 1b.30 x 10 b.30 x 5 1b.30 x 10 b.30 x 5 1b.30 x 10 NS630b 630 b.40 x 5 1b.40 x 10 b.40 x 5 1b.40 x 10 b.40 x 5 1b.40 x 10 NS b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 b.50 x 5 1b.63 x 10 NS b.50 x 5 1b.63 x 10 3b.50 x 5 b.50 x 10 3b.63 x 5 b.50 x 10 NS b.50 x 5 b.40 x 10 3b.50 x 5 b.50 x 10 3b.63 x 5 b.50 x 10 b.80 x 5 b.40 x 10 b.80 x 5 NS1600 / 1600b b.50 x 5 b.40 x 10 b.80 x 5 b.50 x 10 3b.80 x 5 b.63 x 10 NS1600 / 1600b b.63 x 5 b.50 x 10 3b.80 x 5 b.63 x 10 3b.80 x 5 3b.50 x 10 NS b.80 x 5 b.63 x 10 3b.80 x 5 b.63 x 10 3b.100 x 5 b.80 x 10 NS b.100 x 5 b.80 x 10 3b.100 x 5 b.80 x 10 3b.100 x 5 3b.63 x 10 NS b.100 x 5 b.80 x 10 3b.100 x 5 b.80 x 10 4b.80 x 5 b.100 x 10 NS b.100 x 5 b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 5 b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10 NS b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10 4b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10 5b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10 NS b.100 x 5 3b.80 x 10 6b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10 8b.100 x 5 4b.80 x 10 NS b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10 8b.100 x 5 3b.100 x 10 4b.100 x 10 Note With Compact NS630b to NS1600, it is recommended to use 50 mm wide bars (see "Recommanded busbars drilling") 145
145 Installation recommendations Power connections for Compact NS630b to 300 Sizing of bars Vertical rear connections 3 Compact Maximum Ti : 40 C Ti : 50 C Ti : 60 C service Number of bars Number of bars Number of bars current 5 mm thick 10 mm thick 5 mm thick 10 mm thick 5 mm thick 10 mm thick NS630b 400 b.30 x 5 1b.30 x 10 b.30 x 5 1b.30 x 10 b.30 x 5 1b.30 x 10 NS630b 630 b.40 x 5 1b.40 x 10 b.40 x 5 1b.40 x 10 b.40 x 5 1b.40 x 10 NS b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 NS b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 b.50 x 5 1b.50 x 10 b.63 x 5 1b.63 x 10 NS b.63 x 5 1b.63 x 10 b.63 x 5 1b.63 x 10 3b.50 x 5 b.50 x 10 NS b.63 x 5 1b.63 x 10 b.63 x 5 1b.63 x 10 3b.50 x 5 b.50 x 10 NS b.80 x 5 1b.80 x 10 b.80 x 5 1b.80 x 10 3b.63 x 5 b.50 x
146 Power connections for Compact NS630b to 1600 Recommended drilling dimensions Rear connection Rear connection with spreaders ,5 1,5 1,5 Ø1 maxi 1,5 5,5 Ø1 maxi 1,5 Ø1 maxi Ø1 maxi 5 1,5 5 1,5 5 1, ,5 Middle left or middle Middle spreader for 3P Left or right spreader Left or right spreader right spreader for 4P for 4P for 3P ,5 1,5 Ø11 1, ,5 13,5 5 = = Ø ,5 38,5 13,5 5 = = 5 = = 13, Ø11 5 Ø = ,5 13,5 = Ø Vertical rear connection Ø1 maxi 5 Ø1 maxi 5 Ø1 maxi 5 Ø1 maxi 5 Ø1 maxi 1,5 1,5 1,5 1,5 1,5 1,5 1,5 1,5 1,5 1,5 60 1,5 1,5 9, Ø11 Front connection Front connection with vertical-connection adapter ,5 1,5 1,5 1,5 5,5 Ø1 maxi Ø1 maxi 1,5 Ø1 maxi Ø1 maxi 5 1,5 5 1,5 5 1, ,5 Top terminal 44 9, vis M10 15 Bottom terminal vis M , = = 0 3 Ø11 1,
147 Installation recommendations Power connections for Compact NS1600b to 300 Recommended drilling dimensions Front connection (NS1600b to 500) 1,5 50 1,5 5,5 Ø1 maxi 63 1,5 Ø1 maxi Ø1 maxi 5 1,5 5 1, , ø11 15 Front connection with vertical-connection adapter (NS1600b to 500) ø1 maxi ø1 maxi ø1 maxi ø1 maxi ,5 1,5 1,5 1,5 1,5 1,5 1,5 1,5 4 Ø , Front connection (NS300) 100 ø1 maxi ø1 maxi ,5 1,5 1,5 1,5 4 Ø ,
148 Temperature derating Compact NS devices equipped with thermal-magnetic trip units The values opposite are valid for fixed circuit breakers equipped with one of the following modules: c Vigi module c Ammeter module c Insulation-monitoring module c Current-transformer module. They also apply to plug-in / withdrawable circuit breakers equipped with one of the following modules: c Ammeter module c Current-transformer module. However, for plug-in / withdrawable circuit breakers equipped with a Vigi module or an insulationmonitoring module, the coefficients in the table below must be applied. Trip unit Coefficient TM16 to TM15 1 TM160 to TM When the ambient temperature is greater than 40 C, overload-protection characteristics are slightly modified. To determine tripping times using time/current curves, use Ir values corresponding to the thermal setting on the device, corrected as indicated in the tables below. Single-pole and two-pole Compact NS Rating (A) 40 C 45 C 50 C 55 C 60 C 65 C 70 C Compact NS100 to 50 equipped with TM-D and TM-G trip units Rating (A) 40 C 45 C 50 C 55 C 60 C 65 C 70 C
149 Installation recommendations Temperature derating Compact NS devices equipped with electronic trip units 3 The values opposite are valid for fixed circuit breakers equipped with one of the following modules: c Vigi module c Ammeter module c Insulation-monitoring module c Current-transformer module. They also apply to plug-in / withdrawable circuit breakers equipped with one of the following modules: c Ammeter module c Current-transformer module. However, for plug-in / withdrawable circuit breakers equipped with a Vigi module or an insulationmonitoring module, the coefficients in the table below must be applied. Circuit breaker Trip unit Coeff. NS100N/H/L STRSE/GE 40 to NS160N/H/L STRSE/GE 40 to NS50N/H/L STRSE/GE 100 and NS50N/H/L STRSE/GE The values opposite are valid for fixed or plug-in / withdrawable circuit breakers equipped with one of the following modules: c Ammeter module c Current-transformer module. However, for fixed or plug-in / withdrawable circuit breakers equipped with a Vigi module or an insulationmonitoring module, the coefficients in the table below must be applied. Circuit breaker Trip unit Coeff. NS400N/H/L STR3SE and 53UE 0.97 STR3SV and 53SV NS630N/H/L STR3SE and 53UE 0.9 STR3SV and 53SV Note. To provide the Visu function, Compact NS circuit breakers, with or without a Vigi module, are combined with INV switch-disconnectors. Tripping values for the selected combination are indicated in the Interpact catalogue. Electronic trip units are not affected by variations in temperature. However, the maximum permissible current in the circuit breaker still depends on the ambient temperature. Compact NS100...NS50 The table below indicates the maximum long-time (LT) protection setting depending on the ambient temperature. NS100N/H/L 40 C 45 C 50 C 55 C 60 C 65 C 70 C In: 40 to 160 A no derating Ir max NS50N/H/L 40 C 45 C 50 C 55 C 60 C 65 C 70 C In: 100 to 160A no derating Ir max In: 50A Ir max Compact NS400 and NS630 The table below indicates the maximum long-time (LT) protection setting depending on the ambient temperature. NS400N/H/L 40 C 45 C 50 C 55 C 60 C 65 C 70 C Fixed In: 400A Io/Ir max 1/1 1/1 1/1 1/0.98 1/0.95 1/0.93 1/0.9 Plug-in / In: withdrawable Io/Ir max 1/1 1/0.98 1/0.95 1/0.93 1/0.9 1/0.88 1/0.85 NS630N/H/L 40 C 45 C 50 C 55 C 60 C 65 C 70 C Fixed In: 630A Io/Ir max 1/1 1/0.8 1/0.95 1/0.93 1/0.9 1/0.88 1/0.85 Plug-in / In: 570A withdrawable Io/Ir max 1/0.9 1/0.88 1/0.85 1/0.83 1/ / /
150 Temperature derating Compact NS devices equipped with electronic trip units Compact NS630b to NS1600 (1) The table below indicates the maximum rated-current value for each type of connection, depending on the ambient temperature. For mixed connections, use the same derating values as for horizontal connections. Version Fixed device Connection Front or horizontal rear Vertical rear temp. Ti () NS630b N/H/L NS800 N/H/L NS1000 N/H/L NS150 N/H NS1600 N/H Version Withdrawable device Connection Front or horizontal rear Vertical rear temp. Ti () NS630b N/H/L NS800 N/H/L NS1000 N/H/L NS150 N/H NS1600 N/H Compact NS1600b to 300 Version Fixed device Connection Front or horizontal rear Vertical rear temp. Ti () NS1600b N/H NS000 N/H NS500 N/H NS300 N/H (1) For a circuit breaker mounted in horizontal position, the derating to be applied is equivalent to that of a front or horizontal rear connected circuit breaker. () Ti: temperature around the circuit breaker and its connections. 151
151 Installation recommendations Power dissipation / Resistance Compact NS devices equipped with thermal-magnetic trip units Power dissipated per pole (P/pole) in Watts (W). Resistance per pole (R/pole) in milliohms (mω). Total power dissipation is the value measured at In, 50/60 Hz, for a three-pole or four-pole circuit breaker (values above power P = 3RI ). Compact NSC100N Fixed device Additional modules 3/4 poles Rat. (A) R/pole P/pole Vigi (N, L3) Vigi (L1, L) NSC100N NSC100NA Compact NS100 to 50 equipped with TM-D and TM-G trip units Fixed device Additional modules 3/4 poles Rat. (A) R/pole P/pole Vigi Vigi With- AmmeterTransfo. (N, L3) (L1, L) drawablemodule module NS100N/H/L NS160N/H/L NS50N/H/L Compact NS80 and NS100 to 630 equipped with MA trip units Fixed device Additional modules 3 poles Rat. (A) R/pole P/pole Vigi Vigi With- AmmeterTransfo. (N, L3) (L1, L) drawablemodule module NS80H NS100N/H/L NS160N/H/L NS50N/H/L NS400H/L NS630H/L Single-pole and two-pole Compact NS100 to 160 Fixed device 1/ poles Rat. (A) R/pole P/pole NS100N/H NS160N/H
152 Power dissipation / Resistance Compact NS devices equipped with electronic trip units Power dissipated per pole (P/pole) in Watts (W). Resistance per pole (R/pole) in milliohms (mω) (measured cold). Total power dissipation is the value measured at In, 50/60 Hz, for a three-pole or fourpole circuit breaker (values above power P = 3RI ). Compact NS100 to NS630 Fixed device Additional modules 3/4 poles Rat. (A) R/pole P/pole Vigi Vigi With- AmmeterTransfo. (N, L3) (L1, L) drawablemodule module NS100N/H/L NS160N/H/L NS50N/H/L NS400N/H/L NS630N/H/L 630 (1) (1) The dissipation values for the Vigi modules and withdrawable circuit breakers are given for 570 A Compact NS630b to 1600 Version Fixed device Dissipated power Input/output resistance NS630b N/H/L 30/ /0.039 NS800 N/H/L 45/ /0.039 NS1000 N/H/L 65/ /0.039 NS150 N/H NS1600 N/H Version Withdrawable device Dissipated power NS630 N/H/L 55/ NS800 N/H/L 90/ NS1000 N/H/L 150/ NS150 N/H NS1600 N/H Compact NS1600b à 300 Version Fixed device Dissipated power NS1600b N/H NS000 N/H NS500 N/H NS300 N/H Input/output resistance Input/output resistance 153
153 4 154
154 Compact NS Dimensions Presentation 8 Functions and characteristics 16 Installation recommendations 131 Compact NS80H-MA 156 Compact NSC Compact NS100 to 630 (fixed version) 160 Vigicompact NS100 to 630 (fixed version) 16 Compact NS100 to (plug-in and withdrawable versions) Vigicompact NS100 to (plug-in and withdrawable versions) Compact NS100 to (single-pole and two-pole versions) Motor-mechanism module for Compact NS100 to Rotary handle for Compact NS100 to Indication and measurement modules 174 for Compact NS100 to 630 Front accessories for Compact NS100 to Compact NS630b to 1600 (fixed version) Dimensions 178 Mountings 179 Front-panel cutouts 180 Rotary handle 181 Compact NS630b to 1600 (withdrawable version) Dimensions, mounting and cutouts 18 Rotary handle 183 Compact NS1600b to 300 (fixed version) Dimensions 184 Compact NS630b to 300 External modules 186 Accessories Connection 193 Electrical diagrams 09 Additional characteristics 37 Catalogue numbers 51 More information about Schneider Electric 9 155
155 Dimensions Compact NS80H-MA Dimensions Mounting On backplate On rails ,5 48,5 Y (a) 4 Y 4 Y 64, Z (a) long terminal shields Front-panel cutouts Cutout A Cutout B Cutout C A 6 60, , ,5 Z B/C Y 9 14,5 Y 9 46 Y 156
156 Standard direct rotary handle Front-panel cutout 7,5 8,5 65,5 60 tripped 60 ON I O OFF 4, 30 68,5 Z 8,5 11 Y 47, Z 85 Y Extended rotary handle Front-panel cutout ,5 7,5 4, ,5 50 4, 4 37,5 60 4, Z mini 175 L ( maxi 590 ) Y 7 36 Y shaft length = L _ 109 MCC direct rotary handle Front-panel cutout 10 69, 7,5 4, , ± 1 to 3 maxi Y Y 51,7 100 Note. Door cutout dimensions are given for a device position in the enclosure where u (h x 5) with respect to the door hinge. h 157
157 Dimensions Compact NSC100 Dimensions Compact NSC100 3 poles 4 poles (a) (a) 15 Z Y (a) long terminal shields 10 Y 45 4 Vigicompact NSC 101, poles 4 poles (a) (a) 15 Z Y (a) long terminal shields. 75 Y
158 Extended rotary handle 37, Front-panel cutout ,5 75 Ø Ø4, Z mini 1 maxi 147 Y 7 36 Y Note. Centre line indicates the centre of the mounting rail
159 Dimensions Compact NS100 to 630 (fixed version) Dimensions poles or 3 poles 4 poles H1 H3 H5 H7 Z P1 P P4 H H H4 H6 Y L1 L (a) (b) (c) (a) short terminal shields. (b) long terminal shields (available for spreaders on NS400 to 630, pitch 5.5 : L1 = mm, L = 10 mm). (c) interphase barriers. L Y L Mounting 4 On backplate poles or 3 poles 4 poles K1 K K1 K1 K1 K1 K1 K K G1 G5 G T G4 T4 (d) Y (d) for rear connection only. For two-pole circuit breakers, the centre hole is not necessary. Y On rails poles or 3 poles 4 poles U (e) K1 K K K G1 G T Y Y On DIN rail with adapter plate G50 G51 G49 G47 G48 Z 160
160 Front-panel cutouts Fixed or plug-in circuit breaker Cutout A Cutout B Cutout C C C1 C C3 C C3 Z B/C P5 P6 Y R1 R Y R R4(3P) R5(4P) Y With escutcheon With toggle cover C6 C7 C1 C0 4 P6 Y R6 R7 Y R1 R13 Z Dimensions (mm) Type C C1 C C3 C6 C7 C0 C1 G G1 G4 NS100/160/50N/H/L NS400/630N/H/L Type G5 G47 G48 G49 G50 G51 H H1 H H3 H4 NS100/160/50N/H/L NS400/630N/H/L Type H5 H6 H7 K K1 K L L1 L P1 P NS100/160/50N/H/L NS400/630N/H/L Type P4 P5 P6 R R1 R R4 R5 R6 R7 R1 NS100/160/50N/H/L 111(1) NS400/630N/H/L (1) : P4 = 16 mm for Compact NS50N/H/L. Type R13 ØT ØT4 U (e) NS100/160/50N/H/L NS400/630N/H/L (e) U 0 mm if automatic auxiliary connectors are used (NS100 to 50). Nota : Door cutout dimensions are given for a device position in the enclosure where u (h x 5) with respect to the door hinge. h 161
161 Dimensions Vigicompact NS100 to 630 (fixed version) Dimensions poles or 3 poles 4 poles H9 H11 H13 H15 H8 H10 H1 H14 Z P1 P P4 Y L L1 (a) (b) (c) (a) short terminal shields (b) long terminal shields (c) interphase barriers Y L L 4 Mounting On backplate poles or 3 poles 4 poles K1 K1 K K1 K1 K1 K1 K K G7 G1 G9 G G6 G8 T T4 (d) Y (d) for rear connection only. For two-pole circuit breakers, the centre hole is not necessary. Y On rails poles or 3 poles 4 poles U (e) K1 K K K G7 G1 G G6 T Y Y 16
162 Front-panel cutouts Fixed or plug-in circuit breaker Cutout A Cutout B R1 R C1 C C4 C C3 C5 Z B P5 P6 Y R8 R6 Y R4 (3P) R5 (4P) R8 R6 R With escutcheons R7 R6 4 C7 C6 C18 C19 Z P6 Y R7 R11 Dimensions (mm) Type C C1 C C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C18 C19 C0 C1 G G1 G6 G7 G8 G9 NS100/160/50N/H/L NS400/630N/H/L Type H8 H9 H10 H11 H1 H13 H14 H15 K K1 K L L1 L P1 P P4 P5 NS100/160/50N/H/L (1) 83 NS400/630N/H/L (1) P4 = 16 mm for Compact NS50N/H/L. Type P6 R R1 R R4 R5 R6 R7 R11 R1 R13 R6 R7 ØT ØT4 U (e) NS100/160/50N/H/L NS400/630N/H/L (e) U 0 mm if automatic auxiliary connectors are used (NS100 to 50). Note. Door cutout dimensions are given for a device position in the enclosure where u100 + (h x 5) with respect to the door hinge. h 163
163 Dimensions Compact NS100 to 630 (plug-in and withdrawable versions) Dimensions Plug-in base poles or 3 poles 4 poles N M Z (*) K1 K1 K1 H17 G11 H16 G10 (*) P7 P8 P9 P4 Y L L1 L Y L Chassis poles or 3 poles 4 poles N 4 H19 H18 (*) (*) Z P7 P8 P9 P P4 P1 Mounting Through panel M (plug-in base) Through panel M (chassis) P, 3P K1 4P K P, 3P K1 4P K K K Y L6 L7 L8 Y L6 L9 L10 K K G11 G13 G11 G13 G10 G1 G10 G1 T Y K5 K6 Y K5 K7 T Y K11 K1 Y K11 K13 On rails (plug-in base or chassis) P, 3P K1 4P U K0 K K0 G1 G0 T Y Y (*) short terminal shields are mandatory. Nota : Door cutout dimensions are given for a device position in the enclosure where u100 + (h x 5) with respect to the door hinge. 164
164 On backplate N (plug-in base or chassis) Front connection (insulating screen is mandatory between the backplate and the base, supplied with the base) P, 3P 4P K K H0 H H1 H3 Z P33 P3 Y Interior rear connection Exterior rear connection P, 3P 4P P, 3P 4P K1 K K1 K K K K K K T6 G16 G15 G18 G15 T G14 G17 G14 G19 K K K 4 T Y K1 K1 K1 Y K1 K1 T5 Y K1 K1 K1 Y K1 K1 Front-panel cutouts Plug-in base Chassis with protection collar and escutcheons C11 C17 Dimensions (mm) Z Type C11 C17 G10 G11 G1 G13 G14 G15 G16 G17 G18 G19 G0 G1 G G3 G4 NS100/160/50N/H/L NS400/630N/H/L Type G5 G6 G7 H16 H17 H18 H19 K K1 K K5 K6 K7 K11 K1 K13 K0 NS100/160/50N/H/L NS400/630N/H/L Type K1 K L L1 L L6 L7 L8 L9 L10 P P4 P7 P8 P9 P10 P1 NS100/160/50N/H/L (1) NS400/630N/H/L Type P44 R8 R9 U () ØT ØT5 ØT6 NS100/160/50N/H/L NS400/630N/H/L (1) P4 = 16 mm for Compact NS50N/H/L () U 0 mm if automatic auxiliary connectors are used (NS100 to 50). P44 Y R9 R8 165
165 Dimensions Vigicompact NS100 to 630 (plug-in and withdrawable versions) Dimensions Plug-in base poles or 3 poles 4 poles N M (*) K1 K1 K1 H17 G11 H16 G10 P7 P8 P9 Z P4 Y L L1 L Y L (*) 4 Chassis See withdrawable Compact, page 164. Mounting Through panel M (plug-in base) Through panel M (chassis) P, 3P 4P P, 3P 4P K1 K K K K1 K K K G11 G13 G11 G13 G10 G1 G10 G1 T Y K5 K6 Y K5 K7 T Y K11 K1 Y K11 K13 On rails (plug-in base or chassis) P, 3P 4P U K1 K0 K K0 G1 G0 T Y Y (*) short terminal shields are mandatory 166
166 Front-panel cutouts Plug-in base See fixed Compact, page 160. Chassis with protection collar and escutcheons R9 R8 C11 C17 C16 C13 Z P44 Y R33 R34 Dimensions (mm) Type C11 C13 C16 C17 G10 G11 G1 G13 G0 G1 H16 NS100/160/50N/H/L NS400/630N/H/L Type H17 K K1 K K5 K6 K7 K11 K1 K13 K0 NS100/160/50N/H/L NS400/630N/H/L Type K1 K L L1 L P4 P7 P8 P9 P44 R8 NS100/160/50N/H/L (1) NS400/630N/H/L (1) P4 = 16 mm for Compact NS50N/H/L. Type R9 R33 R34 ØT U() NS100/160/50N/H/L NS400/630N/H/L () U 0 mm if automatic auxiliary connectors are used (NS100 to 50). Note. Door cutout dimensions are given for a device position in the enclosure where u100 + (h x 5) with respect to the door hinge. h 167
167 Dimensions Compact NS100 to 50 (single-pole and two-pole versions) Dimensions 1 pole poles H1 H3 H7 H H H6 Z P1 P P4 Y L5 L3 L4 Y L3 (a) (b) (a) short terminal shields (b) interphase barriers 4 Mounting On backplate 1 pole poles K1 K K1 K G1 G5 G ØT G4 ØT4 (c) Y (c) for rear connection only Y On rails 1 pole poles U (d) K1 K K G1 G ØT (d) U Y 0 mm if automatic auxiliary connectors are used Y 168
168 Front-panel cutout C C1 C C3 C C3 Z B/C P5 P6 Y R1 R R4(1P) R5(P) Y R Y With escutcheon C7 P6 Y R6 R7 C6 4 Z Dimensions (mm) Type C C1 C C3 C6 C7 G G1 G4 G5 H NS100/160/ Type H1 H H3 H4 H6 H7 K K1 L3 L4 L5 NS100/160/ Type P1 P P4 P5 P6 R R1 R R4 R5 R6 NS100/160/ Type R7 ØT ØT4 U (d) NS100/160/ (d) U 0 mm if automatic auxiliary connectors are used Note. Door cutout dimensions are given for a device position in the enclosure where u100 + (h x 5) with respect to the door hinge. h 169
169 Dimensions Motor-mechanism module for Compact NS100 to 630 Dimensions 3 poles 4 poles H H0 H1 H3 Z P33 P3 Y L1 L11 L1 L L Y L 4 Front-panel cutouts With IP 40, IK 07 escutcheons and protection collar for Vigi module R9 R8 C3 C11 C C17 C16 Y R14 R15 C13 Z P45 Z P45 Y R33 R34 Note. Door cutout dimensions are given for a device position in the enclosure where u (h x 5) with respect to the door hinge. h 170
170 Dimensions (mm) Type C11 C13 C16 C17 C C3 H0 H1 H H3 L L1 NS100/160/50N/H/L NS400/630N/H/L Type L L11 L1 P3 P33 P45 R8 R9 R14 R15 R33 R34 NS100/160/50N/H/L NS400/630N/H/L
171 Dimensions Rotary handle for Compact NS100 to 630 direct rotary handle 3 poles 4 poles L1 H0 H3 60 DD I 60 O H4 60 DD 60 I O Z P34 P35 (a) P36 (b) P37 (c) (a) sans serrure (b) avec serrure Ronis + clef (c) avec serrure Profalux + clef Y L15 L L11 L1 L Y L (a) without keylock (b) with Ronis keylock (c) with Profalux keylock 4 Front-panel cutouts Fixed or plug-in circuit breaker Compact Vigicompact C C3 C3 C C4 Z P43 Y R14 R15 C5 Z P43 Y R8 R6 R14 R15 Withdrawable circuit breaker Compact Vigicompact R9 R8 C11 C11 C17 C17 C16 C13 Z P44 Y R9 R8 Z P44 Y R33 R34 An escutcheon is mandatory Protection collar for Vigi module is mandatory. Escutcheons are mandatory for rotary handles and Vigi protection collars. 17
172 MCC direct rotary handle L8 L7 L1 Front-panel cutout H4 H10 H9 G38 G39 Z P4 ± 1 to 3 maxi Extended rotary handle Fixed or plug-in circuit breaker Withdrawable circuit breaker Cut shaft at length: Cut shaft at length: P38-16 mm (NS100 to 50) P40-1 mm (NS100 to 50) P mm (NS400 to 630) P mm (NS400 to 630) 10 Y 60 Y K14 K15 L14 L13 I L1 H4 H6 4 O H5 60 Z P38 Y Front-panel cutout 45 L1 T7 H4 G36 G37 Y T6 Dimensions (mm) Type C4 C5 C11 C13 C16 C17 C C3 G36 G37 G38 G39 H9 H10 H0 H3 H4 NS100/160/50N/H/L , NS400/630N/H/L 147, , , ,5 Type H5 H6 K14 K15 L L1 L L7 L8 L11 L1 L13 L14 L15 P34 P35 P36 NS100/160/50N/H/L 37, , ,5 37, NS400/630N/H/L 37,5 75 7, , , Type P37 P38(1) P40(1) P4 P43 P44 R1 R8 R9 R14 R15 R6 R33 R34 ØT6 ØT7 NS100/160/50N/H/L , , , 50 NS400/630N/H/L , , , 50 (1) 600 mm. Nota : Door cutout dimensions are given for a device position in the enclosure where (h x 5) with respect to the door hinge. 173
173 Dimensions Indication and measurement modules for Compact NS100 to 630 Dimensions Circuit breaker with ammeter module Circuit breaker with current-transformer module H9 H11 H13 H15 H9 H11 H13 H15 H8 H10 H1 H14 H8 H10 H1 H14 Z P1 P P47 Z P1 P P4 4 Mounting On backplate poles or 3 poles 4 poles K1 K1 K K1 K1 K1 K1 K K G7 G1 G9 G G6 G8 T T4 (d) Y Y (d) for rear connection only. For two-pole circuit breakers, the centre hole is not necessary. On rails poles or 3 poles 4 poles U (e) K1 K K K G7 G1 G G6 T Y Y 174
174 Front-panel cutout Circuit breaker with ammeter module and voltage-presence indicator T8 C30 C1 C C8 C7 Z P6 Y R R1 R16 R17 T8 C30 C3 C 4 C8 C7 Z P43 Y R16 R17 R14 R15 Dimensions (mm) Type C C1 C C3 C7 C8 C9 C30 G G1 G6 G7 G8 G9 H8 H9 H10 NS100/160/50N/H/L NS400/630N/H/L Type H11 H1 H13 H14 H15 K K1 K P1 P P4 P6 P43 P47 P48 R R1 NS100/160/50N/H/L (1) NS400/630N/H/L Type R14 R15 R16 R17 ØT ØT4 U() NS100/160/50N/H/L NS400/630N/H/L (1) P4 = 16 mm for Compact NS 50N/H/L () U 0 mm if automatic auxiliary connectors are used (NS100 to 50). 175
175 Dimensions Front accessories for Compact NS100 to 630 Protection collar Toggle protection collar M.. A D Vigi-module protection collar Circuit breaker with Circuit breaker with toggle or rotary handle motor-mechanism module 5, Toggle cover M8 A3 D3 Front-panel escutcheons For toggle M M3 A1 D1 D For Vigi module ,5 6,5 176
176 Front-panel escutcheons For protection collar, motor mechanism or rotary handle M6 M7 A D1 D For Vigi module with protection collar or ammeter module 93,5 80,5 Dimensions (mm) 157 3,5 6,5 Type A A1 A A3 D D1 D D3 M M M3 M6 M7 M8 NS100/160/50N/H/L NS400/630N/H/L
177 Dimensions Compact NS630b to 1600 (fixed version) Dimensions Manual control Front connection (1) 163, ,5 Z F 99,5 (3P) 169,5 (4P) Y 99,5 (1) terminal shields are optional 4 Rear connection 105 (3P) 175 (4P) 188 Y , Z F 107,5 140,5 146, Electrical control Front and rear connection 105 (3P) 175 (4P) 188 Y F : Datum 169,5 175,5 107,5 Z F 70 99,5 (3P) 169,5 (4P) 35 99,5 Note. Dimensions for front and rear connection on electrically operated devices are identical to those for manually operated devices. 178
178 Mounting Front connection On rails On backplate Y 4 Ø6,5 Y 4 Ø6, ,5 (3P) 169,5 (4P) 99,5 99,5 (3P) 169,5 (4P) 99,5 Rear connection On backplate or rails 3P Y 4 Ø6,5 4P Y 6 Ø6, Note. Mounting parameters for electrically operated devices are identical to those for manually operated devices. and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device Z is the back plane of the device. 179
179 Dimensions Compact NS630b to 1600 (fixed version) (cont.) Front-panel cutouts Toggle control (A) (B) (C) 14 mini (1) () 150 () Door cutout A 194 mini (3P) 64 mini (4P) 194 mini Y B 16 (1) 66 () 108 (1) 133 () 107,5 140,5 146,5 Z F 194 (1) 44 () 97 (1) 1 () 4 C 194 mini (3P) 64 mini (4P) 194 mini Y 119 (1) 144 () (1) Without escutcheon () With escutcheon 71 (1) 11 () 95,5 (1) 108 () 35,5 (1) 60,5 () Electrical control (A) 150 mini (1) () Door cutout A 194 mini (3P) 64 mini (4P) 194 mini Y 16 (1) 66 () 108 (1) 133 () 107,5 169,5 194 (1) 44 () 97 (1) 1 () 175,5 Z F (1) Without escutcheon () With escutcheon 180
180 Rotary handle Direct rotary handle Dimensions (A) (B) (D) 14 mini (1) () 180 mini () 195 9,5 107,5 154,5 160,5 189,5 Z F Door cutout A B D 194 mini (3P) 64 mini (4P) 194 mini Y 194 mini Y 194 mini (3P) 64 mini (4P) 194 mini Y 4 16 (1) 66 () 01 (1) 100,5 (1) 01 (1) 100,5 (1) 194 (1) 44 () 97 (1) 1 () 108 (1) 133 () 181 (1) 90,5 (1) 130 (1) 90,5 (1) (1) Without escutcheon () With escutcheon Extended rotary handle Dimensions Door cutout F : Datum Note. and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device Z is the back plane of the device. 181
181 Dimensions Compact NS630b to 1600 (withdrawable version) Dimensions, mounting and cutouts Dimensions Manual control Electrical control 17,5 (3P) 197,5 (4P) 188 Y , (3P) 160 (4P) 90 4 Mounting (*) Withdrawable position Bottom mounting on base plate or rails Vertical on uprights or backplate Y Y 4 Ø6,5 6 Ø6, F 90 (3P) 160 (4P) 90 F 109 (3P) 179 (4P) 109 Cutouts Door cutout Rear panel cutout Y ,5 (3P) 17,5 (4P) 10,5 (1) Without escutcheon () With escutcheon F : Datum Note. and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device. 18
182 Rotary handle Direct rotary handle Dimensions (*) Widrawable position Door cutout 4 Extended rotary handle Dimensions (1) Without escutcheon () With escutcheon Door cutout Note. and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device 183
183 Dimensions Compact NS1600b to 300 (fixed version) Dimensions Dimensions (A) (B) (C) 145 mini Y Mounting on rails ,5 166,5 40 Z 0 F 195 (3P) 310 (4P) 180 (3P) 95 (4P) 10 (3P) 35 (4P) Y 4 Ø (3P) 310 (4P)
184 Door cutout A Y B Y , C Y , Note. and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device 185
185 Dimensions Compact NS630b to 300 External modules Control-wire connections to terminal block S : 0,6 mm S :,5 mm 1 8 Ø3,5 Only one wire per terminal. External power-supply module (AD) 60 Ø Battery module (BAT) 60 Ø
186 MN delay unit 57 Ø4, , Chassis communication module ModBus Digipact External sensor for source ground return (SGR) protection External sensor "MDGF" summing module
187 Dimensions Compact NS630b to 300 External modules (cont.) External sensor for neutral 400/1600 A (NS630b to 1600) 4 Ø14 H1 GND VN VC H SG SG /4000 A (NS1600b to 300) 4 H1 SG1 SG 1 GND VN VC H 8 Ø Installation 400/1600 (NS630b to NS1600) 1000/4000 A (NS1600b to NS300) 188
188 Vigi rectangular sensor 80 x 115 mm inside dimensions 4 Ø9 M1MM3 470 x 160 mm inside dimensions 8 Ø9 M1MM3 4 Busbars I i 1600 A I i 300 A Sensor 80 x x 160 Weight (kg) Busbars path 80 x 115 window Busbars spaced 70 mm centre-to-centre 470 x 160 window Busbars spaced 115 mm centre-to-centr M1MM3 bars 50 x 10 M1 MM3 4 bars 100 x 5 M1MM3 bars 100 x 5 M1 MM3 4 bars 15 x 5 189
189 Dimensions Accessories NS630b to 300 Escutcheon NS630b to 1600 (fixed control) A C NS630b to NS1600 (withdrawable control) 4 190
190 191 4
191 5 19
192 Compact NS Connection Presentation 8 Functions and characteristics 16 Installation recommendations 131 Dimensions 155 Compact NS80H-MA, NSC100N 194 Compact, Vigicompact NS100 to 630 (fixed version) 196 Compact, Vigicompact NS100 to 630 (plug-in and withdrawable versions) 198 Compact NS630b to 1600 (fixed version) Bars 00 Cables with lugs and bare cables 03 Compact NS630b to 1600 (plug-in and withdrawable versions) Bars 04 Cables with lugs 06 Compact NS1600b to 300 (fixed version) 07 Electrical diagrams 09 Additional characteristics 37 Catalogue numbers 51 More information about Schneider Electric
193 Connection Compact NS80H-MA, NSC100N Compact NS80H-MA 5 194
194 Compact NSC100N ,5 48,5 48,5 Y ,5 83 Z 5 195
195 Connection Compact, Vigicompact NS100 to 630 (fixed version) Connection dimensions P1 P13 G19 G5 G4 Z K1 K1 Y K1 Front connection Terminals NS100/160/50 NS400/630 Z 10,5 Z 14 5 Connectors NS100/160/50 70 NS400/ ,5 Z 19 Z 14 Z 46, ,5 113,5 Rear connection NS100/160/50 NS400/630 (*) Short RC / long RC 196
196 Connection with accessories Right-angle terminal extensions (upstream only) NS100/160/50 37,5 39,5 (b) 4 0,5 Straight or edgewise terminal extensions NS100/160/50 41 Z Z (b) Vigi module or NS NS400/630 Z NS400/ ,5 Distribution connectors (interphase barriers mandatory) NS100/160/50 Spreader 70 K10 K8 K8 G6 G7 K8 K9 K8 K Z 64,5 66,5 (b) (b) Vigi module or NS50. Y Y Dimensions (mm) Type G4 G5 G19 G6 G7 K1 K8 K9 K10 P13 P1 NS100/160/50N/H/L (1) NS400/630N/H/L ,5 67, (1) P13 = 1.5 mm for NS50N/H/L and Vigi MH module Note. For dimensions of conductors, see pages
197 Connection Compact, Vigicompact NS100 to 630 (plug-in and withdrawable versions) Plug-in base or chassis K1 K1 K1 Z Y Front connection Terminals NS100/160/50 Mounting on backplate or on rails (1) NS400/630 With spreaders (*) 4 P1 8 5 G31 G3 P1 E Z Z G3 G31 195,5 10,5 (1) For backplate mounting, the insulating screen, supplied with the plug-in base, must be installed. Connectors NS100/160/50 Mounting on backplate or on rails (1) NS400/630 With spreaders (*) Z P Z G3 G34 G31 0 (*) short terminal shields are mandatory. 198
198 Connectors (*) NS100/160/50 Mounting through backplate or on rails P9 P30 Z NS400/ Z G34 G Rear connection Mounting through backplate or on rails (*) P P3 Z E G35 G33 P4 P5 5 Mounting on backplate Right-angle extensions (mounted down and out) (*) P6 P7 Z Long, insulated right-angle terminal extensions are mandatory. E G33 Right-angle extensions (mounted up and out) (*) P6 P7 Z E G35 (*) short terminal shields are mandatory. Dimensions (mm) Type E G31 G3 G33 G34 G35 K1 P1 P P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P30 NS100/160/50N/H/L NS400N/H/L NS630N/H/L
199 Connection Compact NS630b to 1600 (fixed version) Bars Horizontal rear connection 43, ,5 N Y 67, ,5 1,5 13 Z F Ø11 1,5 60 Vertical rear connection 43, ,5 5 Z F 31 1,5 9,5 44 Ø11 5 View A detail Front connection 163,5 19 Top terminal Bottom terminal , ,5 15 vis M10 15 Z 16,5 F vis M10 View A detail ,5 Note. Recommended connection screws: M10 class 8.8 Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer 00
200 Front connection with spreaders Z 31,5 F Rear connection with spreaders ,5 Z 83 F 15 5,5 13 Y ,5 1,5 5 N Y Spreader detail Middle left or middle right spreader for 4P Middle spreader for 3P Left or right spreader for 4P Left or right spreader for 3P 77 38,5 5 = = 13, ,5 5 = = 13, ,5 5 = = 13, ,5 5 = = 13, Ø Ø11 5 Ø Ø View A detail F : Datum Note. and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device. 01
201 Connection Compact NS630b to 1600 (fixed version) (cont.) Bars Front connection with vertical-connection adapters = = 1, Z F 6,5 1 (1) View A detail 0 3 Ø Note. (1) two mounting possibilities for vertical-connection adapters (pitch 1 mm). Recommended connection screws: M10 class 8.8 Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer 0
202 Cables with lugs and bare cables Front connection with vertical-connection adapters and cable-lug adapters View A detail 5 Ø13 5 Ø Z F Fixed circuit breaker with 4-cable bare-cable connectors (40 mm ) 5 4 Ø1,
203 Connection Compact NS630b to 1600 (plug-in and withdrawable versions) Bars Horizontal rear connection ,5 8 67,5 114 N Y 44 67, ,5 1,5 F 1,5 60 Vertical rear connection Ø F 67,5 60 1,5 1,5 9, Ø11 View A detail Front connection 15 1, Top terminal Bottom terminal 140 9, Ø11 37,9 9,5 F ,9 6 9, Ø11 9,5 View A detail Note. Recommended connection screws: M10 class 8.8 Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer 04
204 Front connection with spreaders F 50 Spreader detail Middle left or middle right spreader for 4P Middle spreader for 3P Left or right spreader for 4P Left or right spreader for 3P ,5 13,5 5 = = Ø ,5 38,5 13,5 5 = = 5 = = 13, Ø11 5 Ø = ,5 13,5 = Ø View A detail 05
205 Connection Compact NS630b to 1600 (plug-in and withdrawable versions) (cont.) Cables with lugs Front connection with vertical-connection adapters and cable-lug adapters View A detail 5 Ø13 5 Ø11 F 193, F : Datum Note. and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device. Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer and Y are the symmetry planes for a 3-pole device 06
206 Compact NS1600b to 300 (fixed version) Front connection (NS1600b to 500) Z F View A detail Front connection with vertical-connection adapters (NS1600b to 500) 14,5 30 F Z 14,5 4 Ø , View A detail Front connection (NS300) 30 14,5 Z 14, Ø Note. Recommended connection screws: M10 class 8.8 Tightening torque: 50 Nm with contact washer F View A detail 1,
207 6 08
208 Compact NS Electrical diagrams Presentation 8 Functions and characteristics 16 Installation recommendations 131 Dimensions 155 Connection 193 Compact NSC100, Compact NS80H-MA Indication contacts 10 Early-make contacts 11 Compact NS100 to 630 Indication contacts 1 Motor mechanism (automatic reset) 14 Motor mechanism (remote reset) 16 Motor mechanism (local reset) 18 Early-make contacts 0 Motor protection - Trip unit STR/43ME Compact NS630b to 1600 Fixed circuit breakers 6 Plug-in / withdrawable circuit breakers 8 Compact NS630b to 300 Communications option 4 V DC external power supply 30 Earth-fault and earth-leakage protection, neutral protection, 3 zone selective interlocking Fixed circuit breakers 34 Additional characteristics 37 Catalogue numbers 51 More information about Schneider Electric
209 Electrical diagrams Compact NSC100 Compact NS80H-MA Indication contacts The diagram is shown with circuits deenergised, all devices open, connected and charged and relays in the normal position. With OF1 and CAO1 With OF1 and CAF1/CAF 1 14 OF1 CAF1 CAF 11 (1) MN or M (MN: D1, D4; M: C1, C) With MN With M 6 Symbols Q Compact NS SD trip indication contact OF ON / OFF indication contact MN undervoltage release M shunt release CAO early-break contact of rotary handle CAF early-make contact of rotary handle I terminal block for CAF wiring (must be ordered) F1 breaker for the protection of MN/M H1 lamp signalling tripped position Colour code for auxiliary wiring RD red GN green BK black BL blue WH white 10
210 Early-make contacts Following tripping due to an electrical fault, reset must be carried out locally and manually. With MN With MN + SD 6 (1) independent auxiliary source. Remark NS80H-MA and NSC100 circuit breakers are not plug-in or withdrawable devices. As a result, there is no automatic auxiliary connector. Connections are made directly to the device. 11
211 Electrical diagrams Compact NS100 to 630 Indication contacts The diagram is shown with circuits deenergised, all devices open, connected and charged and relays in the normal position. Compact NS100 to 50 Manually operated circuit breaker (1) MN or M (MN: D1, D4; M: C1, C) () for the withdrawable and plug-in versions, SDV and OF contacts can be installed in the circuit breaker, but only one can be connected to the automatic auxiliary connectors. Circuit breaker with motor mechanism 6 Symbols Q Compact NS100 to 50 SD trip indication contact SDE fault indication contact SDV earth-fault indication contact OF ON / OFF indication contact MN undervoltage release M shunt release MT motor-mechanism module CAO early-break contact of rotary handle CAF early-make contact of rotary handle CE connected-position carriage switch CD disconnected-position carriage switch Colour code for auxiliary wiring RD red GN green BK black VT violet YE yellow GY grey BL blue OR orange WH white (1) MN or M (MN: D1, D4; M: C1, C) () for the withdrawable and plug-in versions, SDV and OF contacts can be installed in the circuit breaker, but only one can be connected to the automatic auxiliary connectors (3) wires supplied, must be connected to ensure correct operation. Auxiliary wiring for plug-in / withdrawable circuit breaker Automatic auxiliary connectors Manual auxiliary connectors (wires 0.75 to.5 mm ) (wires 0.75 to.5 mm ) A1 L1 D1 C1 C D4 A A4 B4 Fixed part (front view looking into base) B4 A4 A L1 81 A1 Fixed part (rear view). D4 C D1 C
212 Compact NS400 to 630 Manually operated circuit breaker (1) MN or M (MN: D1, D4; M: C1, C). () for the withdrawable and plug-in versions, SDV and OF3 contacts can be installed in the circuit breaker, but only one can be connected to the automatic auxiliary connectors. (3) options available with trip unit STR53UE only. Circuit breaker with motor mechanism (1) MN or M (MN: D1, D4; M: C1, C). () for the withdrawable and plug-in versions, SDV and OF3 contacts can be installed in the circuit breaker, but only one can be connected to the automatic auxiliary connectors. (3) options available with trip unit STR53UE only. (4) wires supplied, must be connected to ensure correct operation. 6 Symbols Q Compact NS100 to 50 SD trip indication contact SDE fault indication contact SDV earth-fault indication contact OF ON / OFF indication contact MN undervoltage release M shunt release MT motor-mechanism module CAO early-break contact of rotary handle CAF early-make contact of rotary handle CE connected-position carriage switch CD disconnected-position carriage switch Colour code for auxiliary wiring RD red GN green BK black VT violet YE yellow GY grey BL blue OR orange WH white Auxiliary wiring for plug-in / withdrawable circuit breaker Automatic auxiliary connectors Manual auxiliary connectors (wires 0.75 to.5 mm ) (wires 0.75 to.5 mm ) D1 C1 C D A1 L1 A A4 84 B4 Fixed part (front view looking into base) T1 R Z11 e+ e _ Z1 T R T 4 T1 Z1 B4 A4 A e _ e + Z L1 81 A1 Fixed part (rear view). D4 C D1 C
213 Electrical diagrams Compact NS100 to 630 Motor mechanism (automatic reset) The diagram is shown with circuits deenergised, all devices open, connected and charged and relays in the normal position. Automatic reset with MN Following tripping due to an electrical fault, reset must be carried out locally and manually. (1) wires supplied, must be connected to ensure correct operation. () the tripping order must lock out the closing order. Automatic reset with M 6 Symbols Q Compact NS100 to 630 SDE fault indication contact MT motor-mechanism module F1 breaker for protection of motor-mechanism module circuits H1 lamp signalling an electrical fault H lamp signalling motor mechanism in manual position F closing order O opening order orders must not be simultaneous (must be > 150 ms) Colour code for auxiliary wiring RD red GN green BK black BL blue OR orange WH white (1) wires supplied, must be connected to ensure correct operation. () the tripping order must lock out the closing order. 14
214 Automatic reset without auxiliary (1) wires supplied, must be connected to ensure correct operation. Control via switch or relay With MN/M Controlled by switch Controlled by relay 6 Without auxiliary Controlled by switch Controlled by relay 1 F O F O B A MT A4 B4 B A MT A4 B
215 Electrical diagrams Compact NS100 to 630 Motor mechanism (remote reset) The diagram is shown with circuits deenergised, all devices open, connected and charged and relays in the normal position. Remote reset with MN Following tripping due to an electrical fault, reset must be carried out locally and manually. Remote reset with M 6 (1) wires supplied, must be connected to ensure correct operation. () connect SDE terminal 81 to auxiliary-connector terminal 84. (3) the tripping order must lock out the closing order. Symbols Q Compact NS100 to 630 SDE fault indication contact MN undervoltage release M shunt release MT motor-mechanism module F1 breaker for protection of motor-mechanism module circuits and MN/M H lamp signalling motor mechanism in manual position R reset order (must be > 150 ms) orders F closing order must not O opening order be simultaneous (must be > 150 ms, has priority over F order) Colour code for auxiliary wiring RD red GN green BK black BL blue OR orange WH white 16
216 Remote reset without auxiliary (1) wires supplied, must be connected to ensure correct operation. () connect SDE terminal 81 to auxiliary-connector terminal 84. Control via switch or relay With MN/M Controlled by switch Controlled by relay 6 Without auxiliary Controlled by switch Controlled by relay 1 F O F O R R B A A4 B4 B A A4 B4 MT MT
217 Electrical diagrams Compact NS100 to 630 Motor mechanism (local reset) The diagram is shown with circuits deenergised, all devices open, connected and charged and relays in the normal position. Following tripping due to an electrical fault, reset must be carried out locally and manually. Local reset with MN CN1 - CN1 + CN - CN F1 tripping order H1 F O H D1 84 A A4 B4 D B A A4 B4 Q trip unit MN SDE () MT (1) D4 81 A1 L1 D4 A1 L1 Local reset with M 6 (1) () required to ensure correct indication of an electrical fault. Symbols Q Compact NS100 to 630 SDE fault indication contact MN undervoltage release M shunt release MT motor-mechanism module F1 breaker for protection of motor-mechanism module circuits and MN/M H1 lamp signalling an electrical fault H lamp signalling motor mechanism in manual position F closing order orders O opening order must not (must be > 150 ms, be simultaneous has priority over F order) Colour code for auxiliary wiring RD red GN green BK black BL blue OR orange WH white 18
218 Local reset without auxiliary (1) () required to ensure correct indication of an electrical fault. Control via switch or relay With MN/M 6 Without auxiliary Controlled by switch Controlled by relay 1 F O F O B A MT A4 B4 B A MT A4 B
219 Electrical diagrams Compact NS100 to 630 Early-make contacts The diagram is shown with circuits deenergised, all devices open, connected and charged and relays in the normal position. Following tripping due to an electrical fault, reset must be carried out locally and manually. With MN CN1 - CN1 + CN - CN (1) 1 tripping order D1 D1 C1 Q CAF1 CAF trip unit MN D4 D4 (1) independent auxiliary source 6 Symbols Q Compact NS SD trip indication contact MN undervoltage release CAF early-make contact of rotary handle I terminal block for CAF wiring (must be ordered) Colour code for auxiliary wiring RD red GN green BK black BL blue WH white 0
220 With MN + SD (1) independent auxiliary source 6 1
221 Electrical diagrams Compact NS100 to 630 Motor protection Trip unit STR/43ME The diagram is shown with circuits deenergised, all devices open, connected and charged and relays in the normal position. Thermal-fault indication 6 Symbols Q Compact NS100 to 630 F1 breaker for protection of the auxiliary circuit SDTAM thermal-fault early-break signal BP1 SDTAM reset button KA1 auxiliary relay - Telemecanique CA...DN31 or CA...DN H1 lamp signalling SDTAM fault Colour code for auxiliary wiring BL blue WH white
222 Automatic operation tr overload (long-time) protection tripping time overload current greater than Ir (long-time tripping threshold) IQ closing order for circuit breaker Q Note. For a short-circuit or earth fault, only circuit breaker Q opens. The above automatic control sequence is not run. Legend c O: OFF (circuit open) c I: ON (circuit closed) c : either ON or OFF 6 3
223 Electrical diagrams Compact NS100 to 630 Motor protection Trip unit STR/43ME The diagram is shown with circuits deenergised, all devices open, connected and charged and relays in the normal position. Thermal-fault indication and tripping 6 (1) KM1 operating conditions must be inserted between and A1. Symbols Q Compact NS100 to 630 F1 breaker for protection of the auxiliary circuit SDTAM thermal-fault early-break signal BP1 SDTAM reset button KA1 auxiliary relay - Telemecanique CA...DN31 or CA...DN KA mechanical latching unit - Telemecanique LA6 DK1 RHK bistable relay - Telemecanique RHK-41 H1 lamp signalling SDTAM fault KM1 power contactor Colour code for auxiliary wiring BL blue WH white 4
224 Automatic operation tr overload (long-time) protection tripping time overload current greater than Ir (long-time tripping threshold) Note. For a short-circuit or earth fault, only circuit breaker Q opens. The above automatic control sequence is not run. Legend c O: OFF (circuit open) c I: ON (circuit closed) c : either ON or OFF Same automatic system using a bistable relay CN1 - CN1 + CN - CN F1 D1 BP1 D4 C RHK E (1) KM1 A1 A H1 1 (1) KM1 operating conditions must be inserted between 1 and A1. 5
225 Electrical diagrams Compact NS630b to 1600 Fixed circuit breakers The diagram is shown with circuits deenergised, all devices open, connected and charged and relays in the normal position. Power Control unit Remote operation AT BPO BPF MN M motor-mechanism module or 6 (basic) A c c c c c : basic Micrologic control unit A: digital ammeter Control unit E1-E6 communication Z1-Z5 zone selective interlocking: Z1 = ZSI OUT SOURCE Z = ZSI OUT; Z3 ZSI IN SOURCE Z4 = ZSI IN ST (short time) Z5 = ZSI IN GF (earth fault) M1 = Vigi module input (Micrologic 7) T1, T, T3, T4 = external neutral; M, M3 = Vigi module input (Micrologic 7) F+, F1- external 4 V DC power supply Remote operation MN : undervoltage release or M : shunt release Motor-mechanism module (*) A4 : electrical opening order A : electrical closing order B4, A1 : power supply for control devices and gear motor (*) Spring-charging motor 440/480 V AC (380 V motor + additional resistor) CN1 A4-440/480 V A B R motor-mechanism module CN - 440/480 V A1 6
226 Indication contacts Terminal-block marking (manual operation) E6 E5 E4 E3 E E1 M1MM3 F1 F Z1 Z Z3 Z4 Z5 T1 T T3 T4 MN/M D1/C1 D/C OF OF 1 4 OF SD CAF1 CAF CAO1 CAO SDE Indication contacts Terminal-block marking (electrical operation) OF3 / OF / OF1 : indication contacts SDE : fault-trip indication contact (short-circuit, overload, earth fault) SD : trip indication contact (manual operation) E6 E5 E4 E3 E E1 M1M M3 F1 F Z1 Z Z3 Z4 Z5 T1 T T3 T4 MN/M D1/C1 D/C 6 CAF/CAF1 : early-make contact (rotary handle) SDE OF3 OF OF1 CAO / CAO1 : early-break contact (rotary handle) B4 A4 A A1 7
227 Electrical diagrams Compact NS630b to 1600 Plug-in / withdrawable circuit breakers The diagram is shown with circuits deenergised, all devices open, connected and charged and relays in the normal position. Power Control unit Remote operation AT BPO BPF MN M motor-mechanism module or Terminal-block marking Control unit Com UC1 UC UC3 Remote operation MN / M MT MT1 E5 E6 Z5 M1 M M3 F+ D C A4 A E3 E4 Z3 Z4 T3 T4 B4 6 (basic) A c c c c c : basic Micrologic control unit A: digital ammeter E1 E Z1 Z T1 T F1 Control unit Com: E1-E6 communication UC1 : Z1-Z5 zone selective interlocking: Z1 = ZSI OUT SOURCE Z = ZSI OUT; Z3 ZSI IN SOURCE Z4 = ZSI IN ST (short time) Z5 = ZSI IN GF (earth fault) M1 = Vigi module input (Micrologic 7) UC : T1, T, T3, T4 = external neutral; M, M3 = Vigi module input (Micrologic 7) UC3 : F+, F1- external 4 V DC power supply D1 C1 A1 Remote operation MN : undervoltage release or M : shunt release Motor-mechanism module (*) MT : A4 : electrical opening order MT1 : A : electrical closing order B4, A1 :power supply for control devices and gear motor (MCH) (*) Spring-charging motor 440/480 V AC (380 V motor + additional resistor) CN1 A4-440/480 V A B R motor-mechanism module CN - 440/480 V A1 8
228 Indication contacts Carriage switches disconnected connected Test CD CD1 CE3 CE CE1 CT1 Indication contacts CAF CAF1 SDE SD CAO CAO1 OF3 OF OF Indication contacts OF3 / OF / OF1 : indication contacts SDE : fault-trip indication contact (short-circuit, overload, earth fault) SD : trip indication contact (manual operation) CAF/CAF1 : early-make contact (rotary handle) CAO / CAO1 : early-break contact (rotary handle) Carriage switches CD CD1 CE3 CE CE1 CT Carriage switches CD : disconnected CD1 position CE3 : connected CE position CE1 CT1 : test position 6 Legend Connected (only one wire per connection point) 9
229 Electrical diagrams Compact NS630b to 300 Communications option 4 V DC external power supply Connection of the communications option motor-mechanism module N L1 L L3 manual operation opening order OF closing order SDE OF SD SDE Q I Micrologic device communication module CT B' A' B A CD CE Modbus COM craddle + CT + BB BB CD CE Digipact COM craddle B' A' B A + CCP 303 () 5 H1 H BAT module H3 H4 G1G AD module L3 L4 110/40 V AC 4/15 V DC (1) () E1 E E3 E4 E5 E6 + A B A' B' Modbus + / / BB BB + Digipact E3 / E4 twisted pair E5 / E6 twisted pair V 0 V 4 VDC 1A 0 V 4 VDC DC V 6 None of the control-unit protection functions require an auxiliary source. However, the 4 V DC external power supply (AD module) is required for certain operating configurations as indicated in the table below. Circuit breaker Closed Open Fonction protection no no Display function no (3) yes Circuit-breaker status indications and control no no communications bus (1) Drawout device equipped with Com chassis modbus () Fixed device or draw-out device without Com chassis Digipact (3) except if current < 0% In The communications bus requires its own 4 V DC power source (E1, E). This source is not the same as the 4 V DC external power-supply module (F1-, F+). If the 4 V DC external power supply (AD module) is used, the maximum cable length between the 4 V DC external power supply (G1, G) and the Micrologic control unit (F1-, F+) is ten metres. The BAT battery module, mounted in series upstream of the AD module, ensures an uninterrupted supply of power if the AD module power supply fails. 30
230 Communication switchboard This configuration provides remote display and control of Masterpacts equipped with the Modbus or Digipact COM module. The Digipact bus can be combined with the Modbus bus. Software PLC Micrologic utilities SMS PC running PLC Micrologic utilities SMS PC running TCP/IP Communication interface RS 3C Ethernet RS 485 RS 485 Bus Modbus Bus Modbus communication Bus Data concentrator DC150 Device UA150 source change-ower SC150 contraf interface PM150 measure Compact COM Digipact Compact COM Modbus PM300 measure Sepam Vigilohm Altivar 6 Digipact Bus Modbus Bus 31
231 Electrical diagrams Compact NS630b to 300 Earth-fault and earth-leakage protection Neutral protection Zone selective interlocking External sensor (CT) for residual earth-fault protection Connection of current-transformer secondary circuit for external neutral Compact equipped with a Micrologic 6 A: c Shielded cable with twisted pairs c SG1 twisted with SG c 1 twisted with c Shielding connected to GND on one end only c Maximum length 5 metres c Cable cross-sectional area 0.4 to 1.5 mm c Recommended cable: Belden 955 or equivalent. If supply is via the top, follow the shematics. If supply is via the bottom, control wiring is identical; for the power wiring, H1 is connected to the source side, H to the load side. For four-pole versions, for residual earth-fault protection, the current transformer for the external neutral is not necessary. External transformer for source ground return (SGR) earth-fault protection Connection of the secondary circuit Compact equipped with a Micrologic 6 A: c Unshielded cable with 1 twisted pair c Maximum length 150 metres c Cable cross-sectional area 0.4 to 1.5 mm c Recommended cable: Belden 9409 or equivalent. 6 Q I Micrologic 6 H1 H 1 PE MDGF module
232 Earth-leakage protection Connection of the rectangular-sensor secondary circuit Compact equipped with a Micrologic 7 A: c Unshielded cable with 3 twisted conductors: v M1, M, M3 twisted together c Maximum length 4 metres c Cable cross-sectional area 0.4 to 1.5 mm c Recommended cable: Belden 9493 or equivalent. N L1 L L3 Q I U Micrologic 7 M1 M M3 Neutral protection c Three pole circuit breaker: v Neutral protection is impossible. c Four pole circuit breaker: v Compact equipped with Micrologic A v The current transformer for external neutral is not necessary. Zone selective interlocking A pilot wire interconnects a number of circuit breakers equipped with Micrologic A control units, as illustrated in the diagram above. The control unit detecting a fault sends a signal upstream and checks for a signal arriving from downstream. If there is a signal from downstream, the circuit breaker remains closed for the full duration of its tripping delay. If there is no signal from downstream, the circuit breaker opens immediately, whatever the tripping-delay setting. Fault 1. Only circuit breaker A detects the fault. Because it receives no signal from downstream, it immediately opens in spite of its tripping delay set to 0.3. Fault. Circuit breakers A and B detect the fault. Circuit breaker A receives a signal from B and remains closed for the full duration of its tripping delay set to 0.3. Circuit breaker B does not receive a signal from downstream and opens immediately, in spite of its tripping delay set to Note. The maximum permissible distance between two devices is 3000 metres and the maximum number of devices is
233 Electrical diagrams Compact NS1600b to 300 Fixed circuit breakers The diagram is shown with circuits deenergised, all devices open, connected and charged and relays in the normal position. Power Control unit Remote operation (basic) A Control unit Remote operation 6 c c c c E1-E6 communication Z1-Z5 zone selective interlocking: Z1 = ZSI OUT SOURCE Z = ZSI OUT ; Z3 = ZSI IN SOURCE Z4 = ZSI IN ST (short time) Z5 = ZSI IN GF (earth fault) M1 = Vigi module input (Micrologic 7) T1, T, T3, T4 = external neutral; M, M3 = Vigi module input (Micrologic 7) MN : undervoltage release or M : shunt release c F+, F1- external 4 V DC power supply : basic Micrologic control unit A: digital ammeter 34
234 Indication contacts Terminal-block marking E6 E5 E4 E3 E E1 M1M M3 F1 F Z1 Z Z3 Z4 Z5 T1 T T3 T4 MN/M D1/C1 D/C OF OF 1 4 OF SD SDE Indication contacts OF3 / OF / OF1 : ON / OFF indication contacts SDE : fault-trip indication contact (short-circuit, overload, earth fault) SD : trip indication contact 6 35
235 7 36
236 Compact NS Additional characteristics Presentation 8 Functions and characteristics 16 Installation recommendations 131 Dimensions 155 Connection 193 Electrical diagrams 09 Tripping curves Compact NSC Compact NS80H-MA 39 Compact NS100 to 50 protection of distribution systems 40 Compact NS100 to 50 motor-starter protection 43 Compact NS400 to 630 protection of distribution systems 44 Compact NS400 to 630 motor-starter protection 45 Compact NS630b to Reflex tripping 47 Current-limiting curves 48 Catalogue numbers 51 More information about Schneider Electric
237 Additional characteristics Tripping curves Compact NSC A t(s) A : Im = 37,5 x In 0A : Im = 30 x In 5A : Im = 4 x In 3A : Im = 19 x In 40A : Im = 15 x In I / Ir A 100 A t(s) A : Im = 0 x In 63A : Im = 16 x In 70A : Im = 14,3 x In 80A : Im = 1,5 x In t(s) A : Im = 1,5 x In I / Ir I / Ir 38
238 Compact NS80H-MA MA1.5 MA t(s) Im = 6 14 x In I / Ir 7 39
239 Additional characteristics Tripping curves Compact NS100 to 50 Protection of distribution systems TM magnetic trip units TM16D / TM16G TM5D / TM5G t(s) TM16D : 1 x In t(s) TM5D : 1 x In TM16G : 4 x In TM5G : 3. x In reflex tripping: t < 10 ms reflex tripping: t < 10 ms I / Ir I / Ir TM3D / TM40D / TM40G TM50D / TM63D / TM63G t(s) TM40G : x In TM40D : 1 x In TM3D : 1,5 x In t(s) TM63G : x In TM63D : 8 x In TM50D : 10 x In reflex tripping: t < 10 ms reflex tripping: t < 10 ms I / Ir I / Ir 40
240 TM magnetic trip units (cont.) TM80D / TM100D TM15D / TM160D t(s) NS160/50 Im = 1,5 x In NS100 Im = 8 x In t(s) TM160D 8 x In TM15D 10 x In reflex tripping: t < 10 ms reflex tripping: t < 10 ms I / Ir I / Ir TM00D / TM50D t(s) Im = 5 10 x In reflex tripping: t < 10 ms I / Ir 41
241 Additional characteristics Tripping curves Compact NS100 to 50 Protection of distribution systems (cont.) STRSE and STRGE electronic trip units STRSE A STRSE A Ir = x In Ir = x In t(s) Im = 10 x Ir t(s) Im = 10 x Ir I = 11 x In I / Ir reflex tripping: t < 10 ms I = 11 x In I / Ir reflex tripping: t < 10 ms STRGE A STRGE A t(s) Ir = x In Im = 10 x Ir t(s) Ir = x In Im = 10 x Ir I = 11 x In I / Ir reflex tripping: t < 10 ms I = 11 x In I / Ir reflex tripping: t < 10 ms 4
242 Compact NS100 to 50 Motor-starter protection MA magnetic trip units MA,5 MA100 MA150 and MA thermal withstand thermal withstand MA0 MA t(s) Im = 6 14 x In t(s) Im = 9 14 x In reflex tripping : t < 10 ms reflex tripping : t < 10 ms I / Ir I / In STRME electronic trip units STRME A Ir 00 t(s) class 10 (IEC ) Im = 13 x Ir reflex tripping : t < 10 ms.00 I = 15 x In I / Ir 43
243 Additional characteristics Tripping curves Compact NS400 to 630 Protection of distribution systems STR3 and STR53 electronic trip units STR3SE / STR3SV t(s) Ir = x In.00 I = 11 x In I / Ir Isd = 10 x Ir reflex tripping: t < 10 ms STR53UE / STR53SV t(s) I t ON Ir = x In i t OFF.005 reflex tripping :.00 t < 10 ms I / Ir tr = s Isd = x Ir Ii = x In I / In Options for STR53UE Earth-fault protection Ig = 0. 1 x In 00 7 t(s) I t ON I t OFF I / In 44
244 Compact NS400 to 630 Motor-starter protection MA magnetic and STR43ME electronic trip units MA30 MA STR43ME - 10 to 500 A - class 10 A thermal withstand class 10 A t(s) Im = x In t(s) Isd = 6 13 x Ir hot tripping curve cold tripping curve I / In reflex tripping : t < 10 ms Ii = 10,4 x In I / Ir reflex tripping t < 10 ms STR43ME - 10 to 500 A - class 10 STR43ME - 10 to 500 A - class t(s) Isd = 6 13 x Ir classe 10 hot tripping curve cold tripping curve t(s) Isd = 6 13 x Ir class 0 hot tripping curve cold tripping curve Ii = 10,4 x In I / Ir Thermal-withstand capacities are given for circuit breakers operating in an ambient temperature of 65 C. reflex tripping t < 10 ms Ii = 10,4 x In I / Ir reflex tripping t < 10 ms 45
245 Additional characteristics Tripping curves Compact NS630b to 300 Micrologic electronic control units Micrologic.0 Micrologic 5.0, 6.0, Micrologic 5.0A, 6.0A, 7.0A Ir = 0,4 1 x In Ir = 0,4 1 x In tr = 0,5...4 s tr = 0,5 4 s t(s) Isd = 1,5 10 x Ir t(s) ,4 0,3 0, 0,1 I t OFF 0 I t ON 0,4 0,3 0, 0,1 0 Isd = 1,5 10 x Ir Ii = 15 x In. OFF I / Ir x Ir x In Options for Micrologic electronic control units Earth-fault protection (Micrologic 6.0) Ig = A J x In (1) 100 A max t(s) I t ON I t 0.1 OFF I / In (1) Ig = In x A B C D E F G H J Ig < 400 A A i Ig i 100 A Ig > 100 A
246 Reflex tripping Compact NS100 to 630 devices incorporate the exclusive reflex-tripping system. This system breaks very high fault currents by mechanically tripping the device via a "piston" actuated directly by the pressure produced in the breaking units resulting from a short-circuit. For high short-circuits, this system provides a faster break and a trip guarantee, as well as natural total discrimination. Reflex-tripping curves are exclusively a function of the circuit-breaker frame rating. t (ms) STRSE160 TM160D TM16D...TM100D STRSE TM160D...TM50D STRSE ka rms 7 47
247 Additional characteristics Current-limiting curves The limiting capacity of a circuit breaker is its aptitude to limit short-circuit currents. Isc prospective Isc peak limited Isc peak actual current limited Isc tc prospective current prospective Isc The exceptional limiting capacity of the Compact NS range is due to the rotating double-break technique (very rapid natural repulsion of contacts and the appearance of two arc voltages in-series with a very steep wave front). t Ics = 100% Icu The exceptional limiting capacity of the Compact NS range greatly reduces the forces created by fault currents in devices. The result is a major increase in breaking performance. In particular, the service breaking capacity Ics is equal to 100% of Icu. The Ics value, defined by IEC standard , is guaranteed by tests comprising the following operations: c Break three times consecutively a fault current equal to 100% of Icu c Check that the device continues to function normally: v It conducts the rated current without abnormal temperature rise v Protection functions perform within the limits specified by the standard v Suitability for isolation is not impaired. Longer service life of electrical installations Current-limiting circuit breakers greatly reduce the negative effects of short-circuits on installations. Thermal effects Less temperature rise in conductors, therefore longer service life for cables. Mechanical effects Reduced electrodynamic forces, therefore less risk of electrical contacts or bus bars being deformed or broken. Electromagnetic effects Less disturbances for measuring devices located near electrical circuits. Economy by means of cascading Cascading is a technique directly derived from current limiting. Circuit breakers with breaking capacities less than the prospective short-circuit current may be installed downstream of a limiting circuit breaker. The breaking capacity is reinforced by the limiting capacity of the upstream device. It follows that substantial savings can be made on downstream equipment and enclosures. Current-limiting curves The current-limiting capacity of a circuit breaker is expressed by two curves which are a function of the prospective short-circuit current (the current which would flow if no protection devices were installed): c The actual peak current (limited current), c Thermal stress (A s), i.e. the energy dissipated by the short-circuit in a conductor with a resistance of 1 Ω. Example What is the real value of a 150 ka rms prospective short-circuit (i.e. 330 ka peak) limited by an NS50L upstream? Answer: 30 ka peak (see next page). 7 Maximum permissible cable stresses The table below indicates the maximum permissible thermal stresses for cables depending on their insulation, conductor (Cu or Al) and their cross-sectional area (CSA). CSA values are given in mm and thermal stresses in A s. CSA (mm ) PVC Cu.97x x10 4.1x x x10 6 Al 5.41x10 5 PRC Cu 4.10x x10 5.9x x x10 6 Al 7.5x10 5 CSA (mm ) PVC Cu 3.4x x x x10 7 Al 1.39x x x x10 7 PRC Cu 4.69x x10 7.3x x10 7 Al 1.93x x x x10 7 Example Is a Cu/PVC cable with a CSA of 10 mm adequately protected by an NS160N? The table above indicates that the permissible stress is 1.3x10 6 A s. All short-circuit currents at the point where an NS160N (Icu = 35 ka) is installed are limited with a thermal stress less than 6 x 10 5 A s (see next page). Cable protection is therefore ensured up to the limit of the breaking capacity of the circuit breaker. 48
248 Current-limiting curves Voltage 380/415 V AC 300 Voltage 660/690 V AC ka peak NS630bN NS800N NS1000N NS150N NS1600N N N N H H NS630bH NS800H NS1000H NS150H NS1600H NS630bL NS800L NS1000L NS630 NS400 L NS50 NS160 NS100 TM ka rms TM5 TM ka peak N N H NS630bN NS800N NS1000N NS150N NS1600N NS630bL NS800L NS1000L H L NS50 NS160 NS630bH NS800H NS1000H NS150H NS1600H TM ka rms L NS630 NS400 TC150/50/400 NS100 TM TM 5 Thermal-stress curves Voltage 380/415 V AC 10 9 Voltage 660/690 V AC NS630bN NS800N NS1000N NS150N NS1600N NS630bH NS800H NS1000H NS150H NS1600H NS630bN NS800N NS1000N NS150N NS1600N NS630bH NS800H NS1000H NS150H NS1600H A s N N N H H H NS1000L NS630bL L NS800L NS630 L NS400 L NS50 NS160 NS100 TM3 50 TM5 A s N N N H H H L NS630bL NS800L NS1000L NS630 L NS50 NS160 L NS400 TC150/50/400 NS100 TM TM 5 TM TM ka rms ka rms 49
249 8 50
250 Compact NS Catalogue numbers Presentation 8 Functions and characteristics 16 Installation recommendations 131 Dimensions 155 Connection 193 Electrical diagrams 09 Additional characteristics 37 NS80HMA 5 NSC100N 53 NS NS NS630b fixed manually operated 75 NS630b fixed electrically operated 77 Accessories for NS630b fixed devices 79 NS630b manually operated withdrawable devices 81 NS630b electrically operated withdrawable devices 8 Accessories for NS630b withdrawable devices 8 Common accessories for NS630b withdrawable devices 85 NS1600b fixed, front connected, manually operated device 87 Accessories for NS1600b Communication bus accessories and display modules 89 NS100 to NS630 source changeover 91 More information about Schneider Electric
251 Catalogue numbers Compact NS80H-MA (70 ka at V) Complete device Compact NS80H-MA with built-in trip unit MA Compact NS80H-MA fixed/fc rating MA1.5 MA.5 MA6.3 MA1.5 MA5 MA50 MA80 3P 3t Accessories Connection accessories long terminal shields (1 pair) 3P 8034 Electrical auxiliaries auxiliary switch (changeover) OF or SD OF or SD low level Operating handles voltage releases AC voltage M MN 4 V 50 Hz 48 V 50 Hz V 50/60 Hz 08 V 60 Hz 0-40 V 50/60 Hz 77 V 60 Hz V 50 Hz V 50/60 Hz DC voltage M MN 4 V 48 V V 50 V MN 0-40 V 50/60 Hz with time delay composed of: MN 50 V DC delay unit 0-40 V 50/60 Hz direct rotary handle standard black handle red handle on yellow front MCC conversion accessory extended rotary handle standard extended rotary handle red handle on yellow front Miscellaneous indication auxiliary early make contacts 1 early-break contact wiring accessory for early-make contact (CAF) flange mounted operating handle cable operated mechanism for flange handle cable length 914mm cable length154mm cable length 3048mm flange handle grey paint finish chrome finish removable locking device for 3 padlocks 100 identification labels DIN rail plate
252 Compact NSC100N Complete device Compact NSC100N with built-in trip unit Compact NSC100N fixed/fc rating TM16D TM0D TM5D TM3D TM40D TM50D TM63D TM70D TM80D TM100D 3P 3t Accessories long terminal shields (1 pair) 3P 8034 Connection accessories auxiliary switch (changeover) OF or SD OF or SD low level Electrical auxiliaries Rotary handles voltage releases AC voltage M MN 4 V 50 Hz 48 V 50 Hz V 50/60 Hz 08 V 60 Hz 0-40 V 50/60 Hz 77 V 60 Hz V 50 Hz V 50/60 Hz DC voltage M MN 4 V 48 V V 50 V direct rotary handles standard black handle red handle on yellow front MCC conversion accessory extended rotary handles standard extended rotary handle red handle on yellow front indication auxiliary early make contacts 1 early-break contact wiring accessory for early-make contact (CAF) Miscellaneous flange mounted operating handle cable operated mechanism for flange handle cable length 914mm cable length154mm cable length 3048mm flange handle grey paint finish chrome finish 45mm standard front face DIN rail plate 100 labels removable locking device for 3 padlocks
253 Catalogue numbers Compact NS100/160/50N/H 1P/P Complete device Compact NS100/160N 1P/P, NS50 1P with thermal magnetic trip unit TM-D Compact NS100N rating 1P 1d (Icu=5 ka at 0/40 V) P d (Icu=85 ka at 0/40 V and 5 ka at 380/415 V) TM16D TM0D TM5D TM30D TM40D TM50D TM63D TM80D TM100D Compact NS160N rating 1P 1d (Icu=5 ka at 0/40 V) P d (Icu=85 ka at 0/40 V and 5 ka at 380/415 V) TM15D TM160D Compact NS50N rating 1P 1d (Icu=5 ka at 0/40 V) TM160D 3158 TM00D TM50D Compact NS160N/160H 1P/P with thermal magnetic trip unit TM-D Compact NS100H rating 1P 1d (Icu=5 ka at 0/40 V) P d (Icu=85 ka at 0/40 V and 5 ka at 380/415 V) TM16D TM0D TM5D TM30D TM40D TM50D TM63D TM80D TM100D Compact NS160H rating 1P 1d (Icu=5 ka at 0/40 V) P d (Icu=85 ka at 0/40 V and 5 ka at 380/415 V) TM15D TM160D
254 Compact NS100/160/50N/H 1P/P Accessories Accessories Electrical auxiliaries Two pole only auxiliary switch (changeover) OF or SD 9450 OF = breaker open/close SD = alarm switch voltage releases AC 50/60 Hz (V) M MN /130 00/40 380/ (50 Hz) DC (V) M MN MN with time delay = MN 50 V CC 0/40 V CA + time delay unit 0/40 V 50/60Hz rear connections short long Connection accessories bare cable connectors snap-on, for cable 1,5 to 95 ; 160 A set of snap-on, for cable 10 to 185 ; 50 A set of pads right-angle terminal extensions set of straight terminal extensions set of Locks Installation accessories terminal shields short (1 pair) 1P short ( pairs) P (x) toggle locking device for 3 padlocks removable front-panel escutcheons with toggles
255 Catalogue numbers Complete device Compact NS100N (5 ka at 380/415 V) Compact NS160/50N (36 ka at 380/415 V) Compact NS100/160/50N with standard thermal-magnetic trip unit TM-D Compact NS100N fixed/fc rating P* 3P 4P TM16D TM5D TM3D TM40D TM50D TM63D TM80D TM100D Compact NS160N fixed/fc rating P* 3P 4P TM80D TM100D TM15D TM160D Compact NS50N fixed/fc rating P* 3P 4P TM15D TM160D TM00D TM50D Compact NS100/160/50N with electronic trip unit STRSE * 3 pole frame size TM-G, MA and ME versions do not have a combined single reference for the frame and trip unit, they are detailed as a separate frame and trip on page. Compact NS100N fixed/fc rating 3P 4P Compact NS160N fixed/fc rating 3P 4P Compact NS50N fixed/fc rating 3P 4P
256 Compact NS100/160/50H (70 ka at 380/415 V) Complete device Compact NS100/160/50H with standard thermal-magnetic trip unit TM-D Compact NS100H fixed/fc rating 3P 4P TM16D TM5D TM3D TM40D TM50D TM63D TM80D TM100D Compact NS160H fixed/fc rating 3P 4P TM80D TM100D TM15D TM160D Compact NS50H fixed/fc rating 3P 4P TM15D TM160D TM00D TM50D Compact NS100/160/50H with electronic trip unit STRSE TM-G, MA and ME versions do not have a combined single reference for the frame and trip unit, they are detailed as a separate frame and trip on page 59. Compact NS100H fixed/fc rating 3P 4P Compact NS160H fixed/fc rating 3P 4P Compact NS50H fixed/fc rating 3P 4P
257 Catalogue numbers Complete device Compact NS100/160/50L (150 ka at 380/415 V) Compact NS100/160/50NA switch-disconnector Compact NS100/160/50L with standard thermal-magnetic trip unit TM-D Compact NS100L fixed/fc rating 3P 4P TM16D TM5D TM3D TM40D TM50D TM63D TM80D TM100D Compact NS160L fixed/fc rating 3P 4P TM80D TM100D TM15D TM160D Compact NS50L fixed/fc rating 3P 4P TM15D TM160D TM00D TM50D Compact NS100/160/50L with electronic trip unit STRSE TM-G, MA and ME versions do not have a combined single reference for the frame and trip unit, they are detailed as a separate frame and trip on page 59. Complete device Compact NS100L fixed/fc rating 3P 4P Compact NS160L fixed/fc rating 3P 4P Compact NS50L fixed/fc rating 3P 4P Compact NS100/160/50NA switch-disconnector Compact NS100NA fixed/fc rating 3P 4P For 1 sec and 3 sec short time withstand current (Icw) please refer to page 60. Compact NS160NA fixed/fc rating 3P 4P Compact NS50NA fixed/fc rating 3P 4P
258 Compact NS100/160/50N/H/L Vigicompact NS100/160/50N/H/L Comprising: fixed/fc basic frame NS100N NS100H NS100L NS160N NS160H NS160L NS50N NS50H NS50L P (3P frame) 3P 4P trip unit (1) for NS100 () for NS160/50 (3) for NS160 (4) for NS50 (5) for NS100/160/50 standard protection: trip unit TM-D rating P (3P frame) 3P 4P TM16D TM5D TM3D TM40D TM50D TM63D TM80D (1) TM100D (1) TM80D () TM100D () TM15D TM160D (3) TM160D (4) TM00D TM50D standard protection: electronic trip unit SE rating 3P 4P STRSE - 40 A (5) STRSE A (5) STRSE A () STRSE - 50 A (4) type G protection: trip unit TM-G rating P (3P frame) 3P 4P TM16G (5) TM5G (5) TM40G (5) TM63G (5) type G protection: electronic trip unit GE rating 3P 4P STRGE - 40 A (5) STRGE A (5) STRGE A () STRGE - 50 A (4) motor protection: trip unit MA rating P P MA.5 (5) 915 MA6.3 (5) 914 MA1.5 (5) 913 MA5 (5) 91 MA50 (5) 911 MA100 (5) 910 MA150 () MA0 (4) motor protection: electronic trip unit ME rating 3P STRME - 10 A (5) STRME A (5) STRME - 0 A (5) STRME - 5 A (5) STRME - 40 A (5) STRME - 50 A (5) STRME - 80 A (5) STRME A (5) STRME A () STRME - 0 A (4) options: switch-disconnector NA P (3P frame) 3P 4P NA (1) NA () SDTAM 110/40 V AC/CC SDTAM 4/48 V AC / 4/7 V DC
259 Catalogue numbers Compact NS100/160/50N/H/L Vigicompact NS100/160/50N/H/L + Vigi module ME type for NS100/160 MH type for NS100/160 (0 to 440 V) MH type for NS50 (0 to 440 V) MH type for NS100/160 (440 to 550 V) MH type for NS50 (440 to 550 V) connection for a 4P Vigi on a 3P breaker 3P P
260 Compact NS100/160/50N/H/L Vigicompact NS100/160/50N/H/L Installation and connection Fixed/RC device = fixed/fc device + RC kit short RC kit comprising: mixed RC kit comprising: Plug-in configuration = fixed/fc device + plug-in kit kit for Compact comprising: kit for Vigicompact comprising: 3P 937 short RCs 3P 3x 4P 4x 3P 939 kit 3P short RCs x long RCs 1x kit 4P short RCs x long RCs x 4P P 940 P (3P frame) 3P 4P base P 1x 3P 1x 4P 1x safety trip 3P/4P 1x short terminal shields 3P 1x 4P 1x power connections P x 3P 3x 4P 4x 3P 991 base 3P 1x 4P 1x safety trip 3P/4P 1x short terminal shields 3P 1x 4P 1x power connections 3P 3x 4P 4x insulation accessories 3P long terminal shields kit for plug-in base 933 comprising: adapter 3P (1 pair) 1x 4P (1 pair) 1x long terminal shields 3P (1 pair) 1x 4P (1 pair) 1x phase barriers kit for plug-in base 9334 comprising: adapter 3P (1 pair) 1x 4P (1 pair) 1x phase barriers set of 6 1x Withdrawable configuration = fixed/fc device + withdrawable kit kit for Compact comprising: kit for Vigicompact comprising: P 99 4P 9333 P (3P frame) 3P 4P plug-in kit P 1x 3P 1x 4P 1x fixed part of chassis P/3P/4P 1x moving part of chassis P/3P/4P 1x 3P 9301 plug-in kit 3P 1x 4P 1x fixed part of chassis 3P/4P 1x moving part of chassis 3P/4P 1x P
261 Catalogue numbers Compact NS100/160/50N/H/L Accessories Connection accessories (Cu or Al) rear connections short 60mm long 115mm bare cable connectors snap-on, 1.5 to 95mm ; 160 A set of 3 for cable : set of 4 10 to 185mm ; 50 A set of 3 set of 4 voltage plug for 185mm bare cable connectorset of clips for bare-cable connector set of 10 distribution connectors set of 3 for six 1.5 to 35mm cables set of 4 with phase barriers "Polybloc" terminal block (for bare cable) 160 A (40 C) 6 cables S 10mm 50 A (40 C) 9 cables S 10mm terminal extensions right-angle terminal extensions set of 3 set of 4 straight terminal extensions set of 3 set of 4 spreaders 3P 4P supplied with (or 3) phase barriers shrouded neutral link 50A crimp lugs for copper cable for cable 10mm set of 3 set of 4 for cable 150mm set of 3 set of 4 for cable 185mm set of 3 set of 4 supplied with (or 3) phase barriers crimp lugs for aluminium cable for cable 150mm set of 3 set of 4 for cable 185mm set of 3 set of 4 supplied with (or 3) phase barriers terminal shields short (1 pair) 3 P 4 P NSNL long (1 pair) 3 P 4 P insulation kit U 600 V (long terminal shields 3 P + insulating screens) 4 P phase barriers set of insulating screens (fixed breaker) 3 P 4 P Test kits test kits mini test kit portable test kit wiring kit (spare part)
262 Compact NS100/160/50N/H/L Accessories Electrical auxiliaries auxiliary switch (changeover) OF or SD or SDE or SDV OF or SD or SDE or SDV low level SDE adapter for trip unit TM or MA LV installation control and monitoring voltage releases AC voltage M MN 4 V 50/60 Hz 48 V 50/60 Hz V 50/60 Hz 0-40 V 50/60 Hz V 60 Hz V 50 Hz V 60 Hz 55 V 50 Hz-600 V 60 Hz DC voltage M MN 1 V 4 V 30 V 48 V 60 V 15 V 50 V MN 48 V 50/60 Hz with time delay composed of: MN 48 V DC delay unit 48 V 50/60 Hz MN 0-40 V 50/60 Hz with time delay composed of: MN 50 V DC delay unit of 0-40 V 50/60 Hz motor mechanism modules AC voltage MT100/160 MT V 50/60 Hz V 50/60 Hz 0-40 V 50/60 Hz V 60 Hz V 50/60 Hz V 60 Hz DC voltage MT100/160 MT V V V 50 V communicating auxiliary switches for Compact NS circuit breakers OF, SD and SDE communicating auxiliary switches for Compact NS100/160/50 (the SDE adapter SDE for thermal-magnetic trip units is included) communicating "connected/disconnected" position indication switches for Compact NS circuit breakers "connected /disconnected" position indication switches for Compact NS100/ Indication and measurement modules motor mechanism + communicating auxiliary switches for Compact NS circuit breakers 9441 MT100/ V 50/60 Hz + communicating OF, SD, SDE for Compact NS100/ MT V 50/60 Hz + communicating OF, SD, SDE for Compact NS50 ammeter module rating (A) P 4P ammeter module I max. rating (A) P current transformer module rating (A) P 4P insulation monitoring module 3P 4P voltage presence indicator
263 Catalogue numbers Accessories Rotary handles Flange mounted cable operating handles Locks direct rotary handles standard black handle red handle on yellow front MCC conversion accessory standard extended rotary handle standard extended rotary handle red handle on yellow front telescopic handle for withdrawable device accessories indication 1 early-break swith auxiliary early-make switches early-make wiring terminal cable operated mechanism for flange handles for 3 pole breakers cable length 914mm cable length 154mm cable length 3048mm for 4 pole breakers cable length 914mm cable length 154mm cable length 3048mm flange handle grey paint finish chrome finish toggle locking device for 1 to 3 padlocks by removable device by fixed device 9371 locking of the rotary handle keylock adapter (keylock not included) keylock (keylock adapter Ronis 1351B.500 not included) Profalux KS5 B4 D4Z locking of the motor mechanism modules keylock adapter + Ronis keylock (special) Interlocking * Locking device 9344 is required in combination with Ronis or Profolux keylocks - one per lock. ** Requires Castell lock type K form 4, Bolt projection = 19mm. Initial projection is flush. Installation accessories interlocking mechanical for circuit breakers with toggles with rotary handles interlocking with key ( keylocks / 1 key) for rotary handles keylock adapter (keylock not included) 1 set of keylocks (1 key only, Ronis 1351B.500 keylock adapter not included) Profalux KS5 B4 D4Z (1) for only 1 device castell lock kit (locks not supplied) for fixed breaker with rotary handle front-panel escutcheons toggle Vigi module rotary handle, motor mechanism module or extended escutcheon, IP40 Vigi module or ammeter IP (1) 41950* 4878* 935** toggle cover IP43 sealing accessories DIN rail adapter
264 Compact NS100/160/50N/H/L Accessories Plug-in/withdrawable configuration accessories auxiliary connections 1 9-wire fixed connector (for base) 1 9-wire moving connector (for circuit breaker) 1 support for moving connectors 9-wire manual auxiliary connector (fixed + moving) plug-in base accessories long insulated terminals set of 3 set of 4 IP4 shutters for base chassis accessories extended escutcheon toggle Vigi module locking devices (keylock not included) position indicating switches (connected/disconnected) parts of plug-in kit plug-in base FC/RC set of power connections for safety trip for advanced opening parts of withdrawable kit fixed part (for base) moving part (for circuit breaker) P 3P 4P standard Vigi module 3P/4P Spare parts Individual enclosures 10 lever extensions spare screws 1 snap-in nuts (fixed/fc) M6 for NS100N/H/L M8 for NS160/50N/H/L 100 identification labels sheet-metal enclosure IP40 for Compact NS100/160/50 Vigicompact NS100/160/50 Cable extension box NS100/160 Cable extension box NS MGE1 MGE1E MGE160 MGE
265 Catalogue numbers Applications above 55V - consult us. Complete device Compact NS400/630N with electronic trip unit Compact NS400/630N (45 ka at 380/415 V) Compact NS400/630H (70 ka at 380/415 V) STR3SE (U i 55 V) Compact NS400N fixed/fc 150 A 50 A 400 A Compact NS630N fixed/fc, 45 mm pitch STR53UE (U i 55 V) Compact NS400N fixed/fc 150 A 50 A 400 A Compact NS630N fixed/fc, 45 mm pitch 3P P P P Compact NS400/630H with electronic trip unit STR3SE (U i 55 V) Compact NS400H fixed/fc 150 A 50 A 400 A Compact NS630H fixed/fc, 45 mm pitch STR53UE (U i 55 V) Compact NS400H fixed/fc 150 A 50 A 400 A Compact NS630H fixed/fc, 45 mm pitch 3P P P P
266 Compact NS400/630L (150 ka at 380/415 V) Applications above 55V - consult us. Complete device Compact NS400/630L with electronic trip unit STR3SE (U i 55 V) Compact NS400L fixed/fc 150 A 50 A 400A Compact NS630L fixed/fc, 45 mm pitch STR53UE (U i 55 V) Compact NS400L fixed/fc 150 A 50 A 400A Compact NS630L fixed/fc, 45 mm pitch 3P P P P Compact NS400/630H/L with electronic trip unit MA for motor protection MA30 Compact NS400H Compact NS400L MA500 Compact NS630H Compact NS630L fixed/fc fixed/fc fixed/fc, 45 mm pitch fixed/fc, 45 mm pitch 3P P
267 Catalogue numbers Complete device Compact NS400/630H (70 ka at 380/415 V) Compact NS400/630NA (switch-disconnector) Compact NS400/630H with trip unit MP for DC applications MP1 Compact NS400H Compact NS630H MP Compact NS400H Compact NS630H MP3 Compact NS630H fixed/fc fixed/fc, 45 mm pitch fixed/fc fixed/fc, 45 mm pitch fixed/fc, 45 mm pitch 3P P P 3944 Compact NS400/630NA switch-disconnector Compact NS400NA Compact NS630NA fixed/fc fixed/fc, 45 mm pitch 3P P Compact NS400N 1000 V (10 ka at 1150 V) Compact equipped with insulation kit STR3SP Compact NS400N 1000 V fixed/fc 150 A 50 A 400A 3P
268 Comprising : fixed/fc basic frame NS400N NS400H NS400L NS630N NS630H NS630L + trip unit electronic trip units STR3SE STR3SE (U i 55 V) 3P P, 4P 340 4P electronic trip units STR53UE (basic offer) 3P, 4P STR53UE F (U i 55 V) 344 electronic trip unit STR53UE (with options) STR53UE FT (U i 55 V) STR53UE FI (U i 55 V) STR53UE FTI (U i 55 V) electronic trip unit STR43ME STR43ME F STR43ME FI 3P, 4P options: 3P, 3t, 3430 options: 3431 options: Exchange battery option for STR53UE or STR43ME + Vigi module type MB 0 to 440 V 440 to 550 V connection for a 4P Vigi on a 3P breaker 3P ZSI wiring COM wiring SDTAM 110/40 V AC/DC SDTAM 4/48 V AC / 4/7 V DC SDTAM 110/40 V AC/DC SDTAM 4/48 V AC / 4/7 V DC COM wiring 4P NS 400 extension with 150 and 50 A ratings: fixed/fc basic frame 3P NS400N NS400H NS400L 150 A 50 A 150 A 50 A 150 A 50 A All the above trip units can be included in this offer. 4P Note: The frame and the trip are supplied factory assembled as are the trip unit options, whereas the Vigi modules are supplied as loose items. 8 69
269 Catalogue numbers Compact NS400/630N/H/L Installation and connection fixed/rc device = fixed/fc device + RC kit mixed RC kit comprising: 3P 3477 kit 3P short RCs x long RCs 1x kit 4P short RCs x long RCs x. 4P fixed/fc configuration 5.5 mm or 70 mm pitch = fixed FC configuration 45 mm pitch + spreaders Pitch of all Compact and Vigicompact NS400/630/N/H/L is 45 mm. A set of spreaders is available for connection: fixed front connections or withdrawable with pitch of 5.5 mm or 70 mm. upline or downline clearance 5.5 mm 3P 4P 70 mm 3P 4P plug-in configuration = fixed/fc device + plug-in kit kit for Compact comprising: kit for Vigicompact comprising: 3P 3538 base 3P 1x 4P 1x safety trip 3P/4P 1x short terminal shields 3P 1x 4P 1x power connections 3P 3x 4P 4x 3P 3540 base 3P 1x 4P 1x safety trip 3P/4P 1x short terminal shields 3P 1x 4P 1x power connections 3P 3x 4P 4x withdrawable configuration = fixed/fc device + withdrawable kit kit for Compact comprising: kit for Vigicompact comprising: insulation accessories 3P 354 plug-in kit 3P 1x 4P 1x fixed part of chassis 3P/4P 1x moving part of chassis 3P/4P 1x 3P 3544 plug-in kit 3P 1x 4P 1x fixed part of chassis 3P/4P 1x moving part of chassis 3P/4P 1x long terminal shields kit for plug-in base and withdrawable configuration comprising: 3P P P P P 3545 adapter 3P (1 pair) 1x P (1 pair) 1x 3585 long terminal shields 3P (1 pair) 1x P (1 pair) 1x P 4P phase barriers kit for plug-in base and withdrawable configuration comprising: adapter 3P (1 pair) 1x P (1 pair) 1x 3585 phase barriers set of 6 1x 3571 Note: If any internal accessories are required for plug-ins and withdrawable devices, add the necessary auxiliary connections (see plug-in/withdrawable configuration accessories P
270 Compact NS400/630N/H/L Accessories Connection accessories (Cu or Al) rear connections short long bare cable connectors for 1 cable from set of 3 35 to 300mm set of 4 for cable from set of 3 85 to 40mm set of 4 Voltage plug for bare cable connector set of terminal extensions right-angle terminal extensions set of 3 set of 4 edgewise pads set of 3 set of 4 spreaders 5,5 mm 3P 4P 70 mm 3P 4P supplied with (or 3) phase barriers crimp lugs for copper cable for cable set of 3 40mm set of 4 for cable set of 3 300mm set of 4 supplied with (or 3) phase barriers crimp lugs for aluminium cable for cable set of 3 40mm set of 4 for cable set of 3 300mm set of 4 supplied with (or 3) phase barriers terminal shields short, 45 mm (1 pair) 3 P 4 P long, 45 mm (1 pair) 3 P 4 P long for spreaders, 5.5 mm (1 pair, 3 P supplied with insulating plate) 4 P Insulation Kit U 600 V 45 mm pole distance 3 P 4 P for spreaders, 5,5 mm 3 P (long terminal shields + insulding plate) 4 P phase barriers set of insulating screens 5,5 mm pitch 3 P (fixed breaker) 4 P 70 mm pitch 3 P 4 P shrouded neutral link 630A NSNL
271 Catalogue numbers Accessories Electrical auxiliaries LV installation control and monitoring (Digipact) auxiliary switch (changeover) OF or SD or SDE or SDV OF or SD or SDE or SDV low level voltage releases AC voltage M MN 4 V 50/60 Hz 48 V 50/60 Hz V 50/60 Hz 0-40 V 50/60 Hz V 60 Hz V 50 Hz V 60 Hz 55 V 50 Hz-600 V 60 Hz DC voltage M MN 1 V 4 V 30 V 48 V 60 V 15 V 50 V MN 48 V 50/60 Hz with time delay composed of: MN 48 V DC delay unit 48 V 50/60 Hz MN 0-40 V 50/60 Hz with time delay composed of: MN 50 V DC delay unit 0/40 V 50/60 Hz motor mechanism modules AC voltage MT400 MT V 50/60 Hz V 50/60 Hz 0-40 V 50/60 Hz V 60 Hz V 50 Hz V 60 Hz DC voltage MT400 MT V V V 50 V motor mechanism accessories locking device with Ronis/Profolux keylock (not included) operations counter communicating auxiliary switches for Compact NS circuit breakers OF, SD and SDE communicating auxiliary switches for Compact NS400/ communicating "connected/disconnected" position indication switches for Compact NS circuit breakers "connected /disconnected" position indication switches for Compact NS400/ Indication and measurement modules motor mechanism + communicating auxiliary switches for Compact NS circuit breakers 365 MT V 50/60 Hz + communicating OF, SD, SDE for Compact NS400 MT V 50/60 Hz + communicating OF, SD, SDE for Compact NS ammeter module rating (A) P 4P ammeter module I max. rating (A) P current transformer module rating (A) P 4P insulation monitoring module 3P 4P voltage presence indicator
272 Compact NS400/630N/H/L Accessories Rotary handles direct rotary handle standard black handle red handle on yellow front MCC conversion accessory extended rotary handle standard extended rotary handle red handle on yellow front telescopic handle for withdrawable device Locks indication auxiliary 1 early-break switch early-make switches cable operated mechanism for flange handles for 3 pole breakers cable length 914mm cable length 154mm cable length 3048mm for 4 pole breakers cable length 914mm cable length 154mm cable length 3048mm flange handle grey paint finish chrome finish toggle locking device for 1 to 3 padlocks by removable device by fixed device 3631 locking of the rotary handle keylock adapter (keylock not included) keylock (keylock adapter Ronis 1351B.500 not included) Profalux KS5 B4 D4Z locking of the motor mechanism modules keylock adapter (keylock not included) keylock (keylock adapter Ronis 1351B.500 not included) Profalux KS5 B4 D4Z Interlocking interlocking mechanical for circuit breakers with toggles 3614 with rotary handles 361 * Requires Castell lock type K, form 4. Bolt projection = 19mm, initial projection is flush. interlocking with key ( keylocks / 1 key) for rotary handles keylock adapter (keylock not included) 1 set of keylocks (1 key only, Ronis 1351B.500 keylock adapter not included) Profalux KS5 B4 D4Z (1) for only 1 device manual source changeover Castell lock kit (locks not supplied) for fixed breaker with rotary handle 3604 (1) * Installation accessories templates for front panel cut-outs toggle Vigi module rotary handle, motor mechanism module or extended escutcheon, IP40 Vigi module or ammeter IP405 toggle cover IP45 sealing accessories
273 Catalogue numbers Accessories Plug-in/withdrawable configuration accessories auxiliary connections 1 fixed withdrawable part with 9 wires (for base) 1 moving withdrawable part with 9 wires (for circuit breaker) 1 support for 3 moving connectors 9-wire manual auxiliary connector (fixed + moving) plug-in base accessories long insulated terminals set of 3 set of 4 IP4 shutters for base chassis accessories extended escutcheon toggle Vigi locking devices (keylock not included) position indicating switches (connected/disconnected) parts of plug-in kit plug-in base FC/RC 3P 4P set of power connections for standard Vigi safety trip for advanced opening parts of withdrawable kit fixed part (for base) 3P/4P moving part (for circuit breaker) Spare parts Individual enclosures 100 identification labels battery for STR43ME or STR53UE lever extension screwbag sheet-metal enclosure IP40 for Compact NS400/630 Vigicompact NS400/630 Cable extension box NS400/ MGE MGEE MGE630 test kits Test kits mini test kit 4336 portable test kit wiring kit (spare part)
274 NS630b to NS1600 fixed manually operated Complete device Front-connected circuit breaker with Micrologic.0 control unit Front-connected circuit breaker with Micrologic 5.0 control unit Front-connected switch-disconnector Compact NS type N Icu = 50 ka at 0/415 V 3P 4P NS630b NS NS NS NS Compact NS type H Icu = 70 ka at 0/415 V 3P 4P NS630b NS NS NS NS Compact NS type L Icu = 150 ka at 0/415 V 3P 4P NS630b NS NS Compact NS type N Icu = 50 ka at 0/415 V 3P 4P NS630b NS NS NS NS Compact NS type H Icu = 70 ka at 0/415 V 3P 4P NS630b NS NS NS NS Compact NS type L Icu = 150 ka at 0/415 V 3P 4P NS630b NS NS Compact NS type NA 3P 4P NS630b NS NS NS NS Note: Select in addition the connection accessories, device accessories and auxiliaries, control unit accessories and communications options, as required. 8 75
275 Catalogue numbers NS630b to NS1600 fixed manually operated (cont.) Device based on separate components Basic circuit breaker Basic switch disconnector Compact NS type N Icu = 50 ka at 0/415 V 3P 4P Compact NS type NA NS630b NS NS NS NS Compact NS type H Icu = 70 ka at 0/415 V 3P 4P NS630b NS NS NS NS Compact NS type L Icu = 150 ka at 0/415 V 3P 4P + Micrologic control units NS630b NS NS Without ammeter 3P NS630b NS NS NS NS With ammeter (option A) Basic protection Selective protection Selective + earth-fault protection Selective + earth-leakage protection P 8 Connections for circuit breakers and switch disconnectors To order a complete device, order: Front connection 3P 630/1000 A Top Bottom A Top /1000 A Bottom type L 1600 A Top Rear connection A basic circuit breaker and a Micrologic control unit, or a basic switch disconnector, Connections, Bottom P Vertical Top Bottom Horizontal Top Accessories (for the device, the connection, the control unit) and communication option as required. Bottom P 4P 76
276 NS630b to NS1600 fixed electrically operated Device based on separate components Basic circuit breaker Note: The characteristics of the motor mechanism module for electrical operation are specified separately by selecting a part number from the table at the bottom of this page. Basic switch disconnector Compact NS type N Icu = 50 ka at 0/415 V 3P 4P NS630b NS NS NS NS Compact NS type H Icu = 70 ka at 0/415 V 3P 4P NS630b NS NS NS NS Compact NS type L Icu = 150 ka at 0/415V 3P 4P + Micrologic control units NS630b NS NS Without ammeter With ammeter (option A) Basic protection Selective protection Selective + earth-fault protection Selective + earth-leakage protection Compact NS type NA 3P NS630b NS NS NS NS Note: The characteristics of the motor mechanism module for electrical operation are specified separately by selecting a part number from the table at the bottom of this page. 4P 8 77
277 Catalogue numbers NS630b to NS1600 fixed electrically operated (cont.) Device based on separate components Basic circuit breaker Motor mechanism module AC 50/60 Hz Front connection 3P 4P 630/1000 A Top Bottom A Top /1000 Bottom A type L 1600 A Top Bottom Rear connection 3P 4P Vertical Top Bottom Horizontal Top Bottom DC Standard Communicating Standard Communicating 48 V V V V V V V V To order a complete device, order: A basic circuit breaker and a Micrologic control unit, or a basic switch disconnector, Connections, Accessories (for the device, the connection, the control unit) and communication option as required. 8 78
278 Accessories for NS630b to NS1600 fixed devices Connection accessories Front connection Bare-cable connectors + 1 connector shield for 4 cables (40 mm ) 3P (3 parts) P (4 parts) Rear connection 1 long connection shield 3P P 3369 Vertical-connection adapters 3P (3 parts) P (4 parts) Cable lug adapters 3P (3 parts) P (4 parts) Interphase barriers 3P/4P top (3 parts) P/4P top (3 parts) P/4P bottom (3 parts) P/4P bottom (3 parts) Arc chute screen 3P P Brackets for mounting on a horizontal surface 3P/4P ( parts) Spreaders 3P 336 3P 336 4P P 3363 Cable lug kits Electrical auxiliaries Indication contacts 40 mm 3P (6 lug kit) P (8 lug kit) mm 3P (6 lug kit) P (8 lug kit) OF, SD, SDE 6 A - 40 V 9450 (*) Low level 945 (*) Up to 3 OF, 1 SD and 1 SDE can be connected (the SDE contact is standard for electrically operated devices). Instantaneous voltage releases M MN Delay unit for MN R (non-adjustable) Rr (adjustable) 1 V DC V AC/DC V AC/DC V AC/DC V AC/DC V AC V AC (*) see Compact NS. 8 79
279 Catalogue numbers Accessories for NS630b to NS1600 fixed devices (cont.) Locking for manually operated devices Removable toggle locking system Locking by 3 padlocks Fixed toggle locking system Locking by 3 padlocks 3631 Rotary handle for manually operated devices Devices with direct rotary handles Handle Black Mechanical interlocking Red/yellow front Conversion accessory CNOMO Locking by keylocks Ronis Profalux OFF position OFF and ON positions Keylock kit (without keylocks) For devices with extended rotary handles Devices with extended rotary handles Handle Black Red/yellow front Telescopic (for chassis-mounted devices) Control accessories advanced indication contacts (6 A - 40 V) Early break 3388 Early make Locking and accessories for electrically operated devices Pushbutton locking By transparent cover + padlocks Locking in OFF position By Profalux keylocks 1 lock lock + 1 lock with same key profile By Ronis keylocks 1 lock lock + 1 lock with same key profile Keylock kit (without keylocks) For Profalux keylocks For Ronis keylocks For Kirk keylocks For Castell keylocks Operation counter CDM Installation accessories Escutcheon (small cut-out) for manually operated device with toggle Escutcheon for: - device with toggle (large cutout) device with rotary handle - electrically operated device 80
280 NS630b to NS1600 manually operated withdrawable devices Device based on separate components Basic circuit breaker Compact NS type N Icu = 50 ka at 0/415 V 3P 4P NS630b NS NS NS NS Compact NS type H Icu = 70 ka at 0/415 V 3P 4P NS630b NS NS NS NS Compact NS type L Icu = 150 ka at 0/415 V 3P 4P NS630b NS NS Micrologic control units Without ammeter With ammeter (option A) Basic protection Selective protection Selective + earth-fault protection Selective + earth-leakage protection Basic switch disconnector Compact NS type NA 3P 4P NS630b NS NS NS NS Basic chassis and connections Chassis 3P 4P 630/150 A A /1000 A type L To order a complete device, order: + connection A basic circuit breaker and a Micrologic control unit, or a basic switch disconnector, Chassis and connections, Front connection Top P Bottom Rear connection Vertical Top Bottom Horizontal Top Accessories (for the device, the connection, the control unit) and communication option as required. Bottom P 8 81
281 Catalogue numbers NS630b to NS1600 electrically operated withdrawable devices Device based on separate components Basic circuit breaker Note: The characteristics of the motor mechanism module for electrical operation are specified separately by selecting a part number from the table at the bottom of this page. Basic switch disconnectors Chassis and connections Compact NS type N Icu = 50 ka at 0/415 V 3P 4P NS630b NS NS NS NS Compact NS type H Icu = 70 ka at 0/415 V 3P 4P NS630b NS NS NS NS Compact NS type L Icu = 150 ka at 0/415 V 3P 4P NS630b NS NS Micrologic control units Chassis 3P 630/150 A A /1000 A type L Without ammeter With ammeter (option A) Basic protection Selective protection Selective + earth-fault protection Selective + earth-leakage protection Compact NS type NA 3P NS630b NS NS NS NS The characteristics of the motor mechanism module for electrical operation are specified separately by selecting a part number from the table at the bottom of this page. 4P 4P 8 Motor mechanism module AC 50/60 Hz To order a complete device, order: + connection A basic circuit breaker and a Micrologic control unit, or a basic switch disconnector, Connections, 3P Front connection Top Bottom Rear connection Vertical Top Bottom Horizontal Top Accessories (for the device, the connection, the control unit) and communication option as required. Bottom DC Standard Communicating Standard Communicating 48 V V V V V V V V P 8
282 Accessories for NS630b to NS1600 withdrawable devices Connection accessories Vertical-connection adapters for front-connected chassis 3P (3 parts) P (4 parts) Cable lug adapters for front-connected chassis 3P (3 parts) P (4 parts) Interphase barriers for rear-connected chassis 3P/4P (3 parts) Spreaders for front-connected and rear-connected chassis 3P (3 parts) 336 4P (4 parts) 3363 Cable lug kits 40 mm 3P (6 lug kit) P (8 lug kit) mm 3P (6 lug kit) P (8 lug kit) Chassis accessories Auxiliary terminal shield (CB) 3P P Safety shutters (VO) 3P P Electrical auxiliaries SD trip indication contact for manually operated devices 6 A - 40 V Low level SDE fault indication contact for manually operated devices 6 A - 40 V Low level 3380 OF ON/OFF indication contacts 6 A - 40 V Low level Up to 3 OF contacts per device CE, CD, CT carriage switches 6 A - 40 V Low level Up to 3 CE, 1 CT, CD per device Instantaneous voltage releases 1 V DC V AC/DC M MN Delay unit for MN R (non-adjustable) Rr (adjustable) V AC/DC V AC/DC V AC/DC V AC V AC Auxiliary terminals for chassis alone 3 wire terminal (30 parts) wire terminal (10 parts) 4707 Jumpers (10 parts)
283 Catalogue numbers Accessories for NS630b to NS1600 withdrawable devices (cont.) Chassis locking Keylocking in disconnected position Profalux 1 lock lock + 1 lock with same key profile locks (with different key profiles) Ronis 1 lock lock + 1 lock with same key profile locks (with different key profiles) Option for locking in connected, disconnected and test positions Keylock kit (without keylocks) Profalux Ronis Castell Kirk 3377 Door interlock Right side of chassis (VPECD) Left side of chassis (VPECG) Racking interlock (VPOC) Mismatch protection (VDC) Installation accessories Escutcheon Transparent cover for escutcheon Blanking plate
284 Common accessories for NS630b to NS1600 withdrawable devices Communications options For fixed devices Manually operated Modbus COM Digipact COM For moving part Manually operated Modbus COM Digipact COM chassis Modbus Digipact Accessories for Micrologic control units Long-time rating plug (enhanced accuracy by limiting the setting range) Standard 0.4 to 1 x Ir 3354 Low setting 0.4 to 0.8 x Ir High setting 0.8 to 1 x Ir Without long-time protection OFF External sensors External sensor for neutral + earth-fault protection (TCE) CT rating: 400/1600 A Electrically operated Electrically operated Rectangular sensor for earth-leakage protection 80 mm x 115 mm Source ground return (SGR) earth fault protection External sensor (SGR) MDGF summing module External power supply module 4-30 V DC V DC V DC V AC V DC V DC Test equipment Mini test kit Portable test kit Spare parts Toggle extension
285 Catalogue numbers Common accessories for NS630b to NS1600 withdrawable devices (cont.) Mechanisal interlocking for source changeover Interlocking using connecting rods for Compact electrically operated devices Complete assembly with adaptation fixtures + rods Compact fixed devices Compact withdrawable devices Interlocking using cables for Compact electrically operated devices Complete assembly with adaptation fixtures + cables Compact fixed devices Compact withdrawable devices Compact fixed + 1 Compact withdrawable device
286 NS1600b to NS300 fixed, front-connected, manually operated device Circuit breaker Switch disconnector Compact NS type N Icu = 85 ka to 0/415 V 3P 4P NS1600b NS NS NS Compact NS type H Icu = 10 ka to 0/415 V 3P 4P NS1600b NS NS NS Micrologic control units Without ammeter With ammeter (option A) Basic protection Selective protection Selective + earth-fault protection Selective + earth-leakage protection Compact NS type NA 3P NS1600b NS NS NS P Optional vertical connection adaptor 1600/500 A 3P (3 parts) Note: Standard for 300 A. 4P (4 parts) Electrical auxiliaries Indication contacts OF, SD, SDE 6 A - 40 V 9450 Up to 3 OF, 1 SD an d 1 SDE can be connected. Low level 945 Instantaneous voltage releases Locking 1 V DC V AC/DC M MN Delay unit for MN R (non-adjustable) Rr (adjustable) V AC/DC V AC/DC V AC/DC V AC V AC Removable toggle locking system Locking by 3 padlocks Fixed toggle locking system Locking by 3 padlocks 3631 (*) see Compact NS. 87
287 Catalogue numbers Accessories for NS1600b to NS300 Communications options Modbus COM Digipact COM Accessories for Micrologic control units Long-time rating plug (enhanced accuracy by limiting the setting range) Standard 0.4 to 1 x Ir 3354 External sensors Low setting 0.4 to 0.8 x Ir High setting 0.8 to 1 x Ir Without long-time protection OFF External sensor for neutral + earth-fault protection (TCE) CT rating: 1000/4000 A 3406 Rectangular sensor for earth-leakage protection 470 mm x 160 mm Source ground return (SGR) earth fault protection External sensor (SGR) MDGF summing module External power supply module 4-30 V DC V DC V DC V AC V DC V DC Test equipment Mini test kit Portable test kit Spare parts Toggle extension NS300 toggle extension for replacement
288 Communication bus accessories and display modules RS485 Modbus pre-wired system RS485 Modbus junction block CJB306: 6 SubD 9 pins connectors junction block RS485 Modbus connector CSD309: 9 pins SubD with screw terminals RS485 Modbus cables CDM303: display module pre-wired cable, 3 m length CCP303: Masterpact or Compact pre-wired cable (4 RS485 wires + power wires) 3 m length Digipact Bus pre-wired system CCR301: RS485 roll cable ( RS485 wires + power wires) 60 m length Data concentrator DC150 Auxiliary supply voltage V AC, 50/60 Hz and V DC 5083 Junction block Junction block for internal Bus Cables Cable for internal bus 0-meter roll (0.75 mm ) meter roll (0.75 mm) Converter RS485/RS3 (ACE909) 1 V DC power supply included RS485/RS3 (1) TS SCA7 RS485/Ethernet (1) 174 CEV RS485/Ethernet (SMS compatible) () 3050 EGW (1) SeeTelemecanique catalogue. () See PowerLogic catalogue. 8 89
289 Catalogue numbers Compact NS100 to NS630 Source changeover Manual source changeover mechanical interlocking for toggle controlled circuit-breakers NS NS for rotary handled circuit-breakers NS key lock interlocking for rotary handled or remote controlled circuit breakers locks, 1 key Ronis Profalux KS5 B4 D4Z Remote controlled source changeover plate + IVE source /source 4/50 V DC 48/415 V AC 50/60 Hz "normal" "replacement" (identical voltages) 440 V 60 Hz NS /NS composed of: plate IVE (1) NS auxiliary switches OF + SDE back sockets option add: only long RC () () plug in base option add: plug in kit () () /NS composed of: plate IVE (1) auxiliary switches OF + SDE back sockets option add: only long RC () () plug in base option add: plug in kit () () adaptator kit for NS x x 3618 control unit option 0/40 V AC 380/415 V AC 50/60 Hz 50/60 Hz 440 V 60 Hz ACP + control unit BA composed of: plate ACP (1) control unit BA (1) ACP + control unit UA composed of: plate ACP (1) control unit UA (1) ACP + control unit UA150 (communication option) composed of: plate ACP (1) control unit UA150 (1) wiring cable between BA/UA and ACP/IVE (1) the supply voltages BA/UA control unit, ACP plate, IVE and the remote control must be identical whatever the source changeover type. () see products pages. Connection accessories downstream coupling accessories "normal"/"replacement" NS /NS A 3 P 4 P NS /NS A 3 P 4 P x x x x
290 Typical composition of remote controlled source changeover remote controlled source changeover 1 normal device N (1) + 1 replacement device R () + remote controls (3) + 1 plate with interlocking (4) with IVE (5) and its wiring (8) + plug-in kits (if plug-in version) + 1 adaptor kit for NS plug-in (if NS with NS ) + auxilary switches (6) x (1 OF + 1 SDE) for Compact NS downstream coupling accessory (7) for Compact NS (option) + long RC (if back connection) IVE voltages and remote controls are identical. associated control unit 1 source changeover without associated control unit + 1 ACP (9) with BA control unit (10) or + 1 ACP (9) with UA control unit (11) or + 1 ACP (9) with UA150 control unit (11) note: the cable (1) between ACP and BA/UA must be produced by the person doing the installation IVE voltages + remote control + ACP + BA or UA are identical. 8 91
291 9 9
292 Compact NS More information about Schneider Electric Presentation 8 Installation recommendations 131 Dimensions 155 Connection 193 Electrical diagrams 09 Additional characteristics 37 Catalogue numbers
293 Get more with the world s power and control specialist Schneider Electric s expertise is founded on the skills of its four international brands Merlin Gerin, Modicon, Square D and Telemecanique and has accumulated over 100 years experience in the electrical industry. We have established an enviable reputation as a world and UK leader in the distribution and control of electrical power. We regard our customers as commercial partners; technical specialists who, like us, demand the highest standards of excellence in terms of products and projects and services. We are proud to provide the solutions that meet their needs. Schneider Electric also operates the largest, dedicated sales force in the UK electrical industry. Sales Engineers have specialist expertise and an understanding of the customer needs within each of the following market sectors: Commercial and Industrial Buildings Energy and Infrastructure Industrial Processes and Machines 9
294 The real reason for putting technology into buildings is to simplify tasks, enhance safety and improve the quality of life. Schneider Electric knows this and has created attractive, functional products for the residential building sector. Well-being and comfort are key concepts in this area. The same objectives apply to commercial buildings such as offices, hotels, shopping centres, hospitals, schools and care facilities for the elderly. Schneider Electric offer a wide range of solutions in the area of building management services and uses its expertise in all of these buildings to protect people and equipment. Schneider Electric means greater comfort, lower operating costs and enhanced safety. Related industries Retail Education Health Principal customers in the construction market Contracting authorities Main contractors Building engineers Entertainment centres Offices Warehouses Agriculture Factory Private residential Public residential 9
295 Energy Schneider Electric is involved in the entire electrical distribution chain from power plants to end users. Customer demand for complete availability, uncompromising quality and absolute safety has made the search for excellence our key mission. Today, electrical substation and network protection, monitoring and control are highly effective in reducing outage time. Proven technologies offer a wide range of simple, efficient and flexible solutions for optimised, step-by-step investments. Infrastructure Schneider Electric is involved in developing infrastructure and transportation systems around the world. In areas where no failures can be tolerated, such as road and rail equipment, harbour installations and airports, Schneider Electric provides solutions in electrical distribution, control and monitoring, automation and supervision. Key markets Electricity distribution Water Rail Airports Seaports Defence Gas Telecommunications Road Principal customers in the electric power market Power suppliers involved in generation and distribution Utility companies Major contractors 9 Large end user sites Government departments
296 Schneider Electric focus on performance in all areas of industry. Our products and services adapt to each specific business and environment, from manufacturing and production lines to continuous processes in a wide variety of industries, such as: Automotive Pharmaceutical Petrochemical Food and beverage Oil/steel/coal Packaging Material handling Principal customers in the industry market Large multinational industrial groups Small and medium-sized manufacturers Original equipment manufacturers System integrators Contractors/panel builders Electrical equipment distributors 9
297 Schneider Electric Services - complete life cycle support Schneider Electric offers you the complete solution. A comprehensive array of fully integrated, high quality products, supported by a premium services offer. Complete life cycle support encompasses the total services needs of customers. This ranges across a broad spectrum of support services, from initial conceptual design, through to crucial After Sales support. Modernise End of life cycle Retrofit Remote monitoring Technical support Adaptation Operate Spares and repairs 4 hour a day assistance Extended warranty Preventative maintenance Equipment survey Complete life cycle support Design Network studies System layout and design Project management Energy efficiency Application studies Install Equipment supply Installation Test Commissioning Training To complement the high standard of services, Schneider Electric also offer a comprehensive programme of 48 training courses intended to increase customers product knowledge and associated skills. 9
298 9
299 Nationwide support on one number - call the Customer Information Centre on Fax Schneider Electric s local support Schneider Electric is committed to supporting its customers at every stage of a project. Our 180 sales engineers, the largest dedicated sales force in the UK electrical industry, operate from 4 customer support centres. Our sales engineers are skilled at assessing individual re q u i rements and combined with the expert support of our pro d u c t specialists, will develop the most effective and economical answer taking relevant regulations and standards fully into account. To access the expertise of the Schneider Electric group, please call Each customer support centre includes facilities for demonstrations and training, and presentation rooms fully equipped with audio visual and video, providing excellent meeting facilities. Merlin Gerin is a world leader in the manufacture and supply of high, medium and low voltage products for the distribution, protection, control and management of electrical systems. Its quality products, solutions and services are focused on the needs of both the commercial and industrial sectors. Get more with the world s Modicon is a world leader in high technology programmable controllers (PLCs) and motion control systems used in industrial automation. Its international catalogue includes PLCs, numerical controllers, terminals, software, multiple fieldbus and ethernet communication networks, and human machine interfaces (HMI). Square D is a total quality organisation and its business is to put electricity to work productively and effectively, protecting people, buildings and equipment. Its low voltage electrical distribution equipment, systems and services are used extensively in residential and commercial applications. Power & Control specialist Telemecanique is a UK market leader and world expert in industrial control and automation. It provides complete solutions, with its range of components, programmable logic controllers, variable speed drives and communications software. In addition, it offers power distribution through prefabricated busbar trunking. Local customer support centres Scotland Schneider Electric Ltd Unit Academy Business Park Gower Street Glasgow G51 1PR [email protected] South West Schneider Electric Ltd 190 Park Avenue Aztec West Almondsbury Bristol BS3 4TP [email protected] Regional product showrooms North West Schneider Electric Ltd 8 Brindley Road City Park Business Village Cornbrook Manchester M16 9HQ [email protected] Industrial processes and machines product showroom Schneider Electric Ltd, University of Warwick Science Park, Sir William Lyons Road, Coventry CV4 7EZ Commercial and industrial buildings product showroom Schneider Electric Ltd, Fordhouse Road, Wolverhampton WV10 9ED Energy and infrastructure product showroom Schneider Electric Ltd, 13 Jack Lane, Hunslet, Leeds LS10 1BS Greater London Schneider Electric Ltd nd Floor 408 Strand London WCR 0NE [email protected]
Low voltage Direct Current Network. Compact NSX DC PV. Circuit breakers and switch disconnectors for solar application.
Low voltage Direct Current Network Compact NSX DC PV Circuit breakers and switch disconnectors for solar application Catalogue 2012 Compact NSX DC PV A complete DC offer for solar application from 80
more than a breaker it s a breakthrough Compact NSX
Compact NSX, more than a breaker it s a breakthrough Compact NSX 100-630 A Intelligent outlook Today, we are living in an increasingly booming and fast changing world where energy is key. More than ever,
Data Bulletin. Choosing a Trip Unit for PowerPact H-, J-, and L-Frame Circuit Breakers. Introduction. Thermal-Magnetic or Electronic Trip Unit?
Data Bulletin 011DB110 07/01 Choosing a Trip Unit for PowerPact H-, J-, and L-Frame Circuit Breakers ENGLISH Inoduction Thermal-Magnetic or Eleconic Trip Unit? Thermal-Magnetic Trip Units 01171 t 0119
Low Voltage. EasyPact CVS. Moulded-case circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors from 100 to 630 A. Catalogue 2011
Low Voltage EasyPact CVS Moulded-case circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors from 100 to 630 A Catalogue 2011 Safe Reliable Simple The easy choice for quality and value EasyPact CVS LV circuit breakers
Electronic Trip Circuit Breaker Basics Circuit Breaker Application Guide Class 0600
Electronic Trip Circuit Breaker Basics Circuit Breaker Application Guide Class 0600 Data Bulletin 0600DB1104 03/2012 Retain for future use. Electronic Trip Circuit Breaker Basics 0600DB1104 Table of Contents
Breaking and protection devices
Breaking and protection devices 05 POWER GUIDE 2009 / BOOK 05 INTRO The purpose of selecting a protection device is to perform two essential functions: to protect people and to protect trunking, while
DET NORSKE VERITAS TYPE APPROVAL CERTIFICATE
DET NORSKE VERITAS TYPE APPROVAL CERTIFICATE CERTIFICATE NO. E-8311 This Certificate consists of 7 pages This is to certify that the Circuit Breaker with type designation(s) Compact "NS 80 to 630" Holder
LV power air circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors
LV power air circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors Catalogue NT and NW Merlin Gerin We do more with electricity Industries SA 5, rue Nadar 92506 Rueil-Malmaison Cedex France Tel : +33 (0)1 41 29 82
R.C.C.B. s two-pole LEXIC
87045 LIMOGES Cedex Telephone : (+33) 05 55 06 87 87 Fax : (+ 33) 05 55 06 88 88 R.C.C.B. s two-pole LEXIC 089 06/09/10/11/12/15/16/17/18/ 27/28/29/30/35, CONTENTS PAGES 1. Electrical and mechanical characteristics...
Compact, Interpact and Masterpact. Source changeover system. Catalogue 2007
Compact, Interpact and Masterpact Source changeover system Catalogue 2007 PB100839 To ensure a continuous supply of electrical power, certain installations are connected to two sources: a normal source
Masterpact NW Circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors from 800 to 6300 A
Low voltage electrical distribution Masterpact NW Circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors from 800 to 6300 A User manual 09/2009 User manual for circuit breakers and switch-disconnectors Masterpact
SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices Air Circuit Breakers
Siemens AG 9 SENTRON Switching and rotection Devices Air Circuit reakers 5 5/ Introduction 3WL Air Circuit reakers 3WL Air Circuit reakers/ Non-Automatic Air Circuit reakers up to 63 A (AC) 5/6 General
Technical catalogue - Ordering Codes. SACE Tmax XT New low voltage moulded-case circuit-breakers up to 250 A 50 C rated
Technical catalogue - Ordering Codes SACE Tmax XT New low voltage moulded-case circuit-breakers up to 250 A 50 C rated New SACE Tmax XT. Simply XTraordinary. Today a highly advanced range of circuit-breakers
Circuit Breakers. Next Generation of Protection Capabilities
Circuit Breakers Next Generation of Protection Capabilities Circuit Breaker Offering Rockwell Automation offers a full line of Allen-Bradley circuit breakers and motor protection devices to help meet many
Low Voltage. Vigirex. Residual-current protection relays. Catalogue 2008
Low Voltage Vigirex Residual-current protection relays Catalogue 2008 Vigirex Contents Presentation 2 Functions and characteristics A-1 Installation and connection B-1 Technical aspects C-1 Catalogue
Tmax MCCBs. Molded case circuit breakers. Tmax
Molded case circuit breakers Introduction ABB is once again demonstrating its commitment to new product development and its superiority in product performance. Never before has the industry seen such high
Wiring diagrams. Compact NSX. Contents
Compact NSX Wiring diagrams Contents Functions and characteristics A-1 nstallation recommendations B-1 Dimensions and connection C-1 Compact NSX100 to 630 Fixed circuit breakers D-2 Plug-in / withdrawable
Sentron Series Circuit Breakers
Sentron Series Circuit Breakers Siemens Sentron Series circuit breakers are available in nine frame sizes: ED, FD, JD, LD, LMD, MD, ND, PD, and RD. Sentron Series circuit breakers have a wide range of
ZONE SELECTIVE INTERLOCKING (ZSI) APPLICATION AND TESTING GUIDE SIEMENS WL UL489 AND UL1066 AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Definition: Zone Selective Interlocking (ZSI) - A method which allows two or more ground fault breakers to communicate with each other so that a short circuit or ground fault will be cleared by the breaker
3.1.1 Full Type Tests & Routine Tests according to Clause 8 2 & 8 3. 4.0 Instructions For Installation, Operation & Maintenance
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARD SEN I N D E X Description 10 STANDARD TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS 11 Standards 12 General Operating Conditions 13 General Description Of Switchboard 131 Structure 132
Electrical auxiliaries 0 For i DPN (DPN), C60 and C120
Circuit protection For i DPN (DPN), C60 and C120 Function They remotely trip or indicate circuit-breakers, with or without Vigi module. Description b They are mounted to the left of the circuit-breaker
LC1D65AM7 TeSys D contactor - 3P(3 NO) - AC-3 - <= 440 V 65 A - 220 V AC coil
Product data sheet Characteristics LC1D65AM7 TeSys D contactor - 3P(3 NO) - AC-3 -
P System Cubicles. Certified for more safety
P System Cubicles Prisma Plus LV Switchboards Certified for more safety Prisma Plus, an offer thought out for greater professionalism With the Prisma Plus P system, Schneider Electric proposes high-performance
Quick Connect. quick - simple - efficient. www.g-mw.de
Quick Connect quick - simple - efficient www.g-mw.de Phone: +49 9103 7129-0 Fax: +49 9103 7129-207 Innovative connection technology to plug three single-phase current transformers to multifunctional power
NEXT SOLUTION EXPERT SOLUTION EXCELLENT SOLUTION. Super Solution
NEXT SOLUTION EXPERT SOLUTION EXCELLENT SOLUTION Super Solution Low voltage circuit breakers Susol LV circuit breakers Super Solution Contents Overview Electrical characteristics Trip units Accessories
Mini Circuit Breakers, Fuse Blocks, and Electronic Circuit Protection
Technical Data Mini Circuit Breakers, Fuse Blocks, and Electronic Circuit Protection Topic Page 1489-M Miniature Circuit Breakers 2 1492-SP Supplementary Protectors 15 1492-D Circuit Breakers 27 188 Regional
Actuator-Sensor-Interface
Selection and ordering data Design Order No. Price Pack 3RX9 307-0AA00 3RX9 307-1AA00 4FD5 213-0AA10-1A 3RX9 305-1AA00 3RX9 306-1AA00 Single output IP 65 current 2.4 A Rated input voltage DC 24 V current
Compact NS. LV circuit breakers from 630 to 3200 A. Network protection. Supervision. Compact
Comact NS LV circuit breakers from 630 to 3200 A Network rotection Comact Suervision Comact NS range More than 10 years of techniques and technologies Inventor of the unique system-block concet, Schneider
Manual Motor Starter MS 116 up to 16 A Technical Data
Manual Motor Starter MS 116 up to 16 A Technical Data Type MS 116 Standards: Major International IEC 60 947-4-1 / IEC 60 947-2 and European Standards EN 60 947-4-1 / EN 60 947-2 Approvals, Certificates
Voltage Regulator SPAU 341 C. Product Guide
Issued: July 1998 Status: Updated Version: D/25.04.2006 Data subject to change without notice Features Comprehensive voltage regulation for power transformers with on-load tapchangers in distribution substations
NDQ5 Series. Automatic Transfer Switch. Shanghai Liangxin Electrical CO.,LTD
Shanghai Liangxin Electrical CO.,LTD Address: No. 668 Heng An Road, Pu Dong New District, Shanghai Zip: 200137 Tel: 86-21-5012789 Fax: 86-21-58675966 E-mail: [email protected] LINE 1 LINE 3 LINE 5
AF09-30-22-.. / AF09Z-30-22-.. 2-stack 3-pole Contactors AC / DC Operated - with Screw Terminals
Technical Datasheet 1SBC101403D0201 24/03/11 AF09-30-22-.. / AF09Z-30-22-.. 2-stack 3-pole Contactors AC / DC Operated - with Screw Terminals AF09(Z) contactors are used for controlling power circuits
Products and solutions for lifting systems
Products and solutions for lifting systems 100% electricity www.lovatoelectric.com Tra dition and Innovation LOVATO Electric S.p.A. - Bergamo - Italy Since 1922 The first LOVATO Electric headquarters founded
Low Voltage Products. Switches Automatic Transfer Switches
Low Voltage Products Switches Automatic Transfer Switches Growing importance of a secure power supply Standby power is an integral part of many industrial and domestic electrical systems. High energy prices,
A project to optimise quality and energy efficiency must include metering
EMDX 3 : Energy Metering A project to optimise quality and energy efficiency must include metering Metering upstream identifies the critical points and ensures optimum targeting of the actions to be taken,
Bulletin 150 Smart Motor Controllers SMC-3 Smart Motor Controller
Overview/Modes of Operation Bulletin 150 Smart Motor Controller The SMC-3 is a compact, simple to use, solid-state motor controller designed to operate 3-phase motors. It features a built-in overload relay
Safety automation solutions
Operating principle, characteristics Preventa safety s types XPS AV,, For and switch monitoring Operating principle Safety s XPS AV, and are used for monitoring circuits conforming to standards EN/ISO
Unified requirements for systems with voltages above 1 kv up to 15 kv
(1991) (Rev.1 May 2001) (Rev.2 July 2003) (Rev.3 Feb 2015) Unified requirements for systems with voltages above 1 kv up to 15 kv 1. General 1.1 Field of application The following requirements apply to
ELEKTROTEHNI KO PODJETJE Leskoπkova cesta 12, 1000 Ljubljana, SLOVENIA
MRO Modularne Razdelilne Omare d.o.o. ELEKTROTEHNI KO PODJETJE Leskoπkova cesta 2, 000 Ljubljana, LOVENIA MC GENERAL When to use? MC - modular switchgear cabinets are type-tested, factory built switchgears,
Technical catalogue - 2015.10. SACE Tmax XT New low voltage moulded-case circuit-breakers up to 250 A
Technical catalogue - 2015.10 SACE Tmax XT New low voltage moulded-case circuit-breakers up to 250 A Construction Characteristics 1 The SACE Tmax XT Ranges 2 Accessories 3 Characteristic Curves and Technical
General information Circuit breakers for power distribution T1 T3
Circuit breakers for power distribution T1 T3 T1 T2 T3 T1 1P T1 T2 T3 UL 489 CSA C22.2 Frame size A 100 100 100 225 Number of poles Nr 1 3, 4 3, 4 3, 4 Rated voltage AC (50-60 Hz) V 277 600Y / 347V 480
30 minutes to perform a retrofit of your Masterpact M
30 minutes to perform a retrofit of your Masterpact M "Plug and Play" retrofit solution 2009 Fast and easy implementation Continuity of service guaranteed Certified "Plug and Play" solution "Plug and Play"
MASTERPACT Universal Power Circuit Breaker
MASTERPACT Universal Power Circuit Breaker Class 31 CONTENTS Description Page Introduction... 1 Advantages... 3 Description... Control Units... 7 Accessories... 3 Switch... 3 Trip Curves... 37 Wiring Diagrams...
UniGear ZS1. Medium voltage, arc proof, air insulated switchgear for primary distribution
UniGear ZS1 Medium voltage, arc proof, air insulated switchgear for primary distribution UniGear ZS1: an innovative solution for all installation requirements ABB UniGear is medium voltage metal-clad,
MEDIUM VOLTAGE CE-BF SWITCHBOARDS. UP TO 40.5 kv. CE - BF - C - en - REV.00 2012.4
CE - BF - C - en - REV.00 2012.4 APPLICATION CE-BF Switchbords up to 40.5 kv are designed for use in public and industrial distribution system up to 40,5KV for the operation and protection of lines, transformers,
Coordination and protection of busbar distribution
Low Voltage expert guides Coordination and protection of busbar distribution n 1 Content Busbar distribution system 3 1.1 Performance criteria of a LV Busbar distribution 3 1.2. Functions 6 Level A: transmission
CAT ATC POWER BREAKER & POWER CASE SWITCH AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
CAT ATC POWER BREAKER & POWER CASE SWITCH AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH Cat transfer switches are designed for a variety of standby power applications. They provide flexibility, reliability and value in a
Power Meter Series 700
PowerLogic power-monitoring units Power Meter Series 700 Technical data sheet 2007 Functions and characteristics E90463 The PowerLogic Power Meter Series 700 offers all the measurement capabilities required
Motor circuit-breakers
Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers type GV2-M GV2-M Thermal-magnetic motor circuit-breakers GV2-M Pushbutton control Standard power ratings Setting Magnetic Thermal Reference Weight of 3-phase motors
Permissible ambient temperature Operation Storage, transport
The Sitras PRO combined DC protective unit and controller is used in the power supply for DC railways in mass transit and main-line systems up 3,000 V DC. It protects DC switch gear and contact line systems
Process modules Digital input PMI for 24 V DC inputs for 120 V AC inputs
E031026 000823 Process modules Digital input PMI for inputs for 120 V AC inputs PMI Input E4, E5, GND L- PMI 120 V AC Input E4, E5, Common C E6, E7, GND L- E6, E7, Common C LEDs for the inputs operation
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breaker 3120-...-M1-..
Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breaker -...-M-.. Description Single or two pole rocker switch/thermal-magnetic circuit breaker with trip-free mechanism (S-type TM CBE to EN 34). The addition of a magnetic tripping
ELR: ABB range of front panel residual current relays Protection device according to IEC/EN 60947-2 Annex M
ELR: ABB range of front panel residual current relays Protection device according to IEC/EN 60947-2 Annex M Tested, certified, reliable Network monitoring and protection The electronic residual current
Emergency stop As an emergency switching off/emergency stop device. Standards According to IEC/EN 60204-1, VDE 0113 Part 1
MainswitchSurfacemounting Partno. P3-63/I4/SVB Articleno. 207343 CatalogNo. SP3-063-I4CRQ IP65 Deliveryprogramme Product range Switch-disconnectors Basic function Main switches Maintenance switches Manual
Catalog. Arc Guard System TM TVOC-2
Catalog Arc Guard System TM TVOC-2 Introduction An even better Arc Guard System TVOC-2, ABB s latest Arc Monitor, builds on the well known TVOC design. Its new functions and features improve an already
IZM ACB/Circuit-breakers. Robust safety. Extract from Main Catalogue HPL2010 IZM26 Circuit-breakers IN26 Switch-disconnectors
IZM ACB/Circuit-breakers Robust safety Extract from Main Catalogue HPL2010 IZM26 Circuit-breakers IN26 Switch-disconnectors t [s] 0.1 0.05 0.04 0.03 0.02 0.01 20 1230DIA-125 (70C1043) 30 40 50 60 80 100
RM17TE 183...528 V AC. Main. Product or component type. Product specific application. Relay monitored parameters 250 V DC 5 A DC
Characteristics multifunction control relay RM17-TE - range 183..528 V AC Complementary Reset time Maximum switching voltage Minimum switching current Maximum switching current [Us] rated supply voltage
Type: EASY719 DC RC Article No.: 274119. Ordering information Relay outputs Quantity 6 Power supply V DC 24 V DC. Description
Type: EASY719 DC RC Article.: 274119 Ordering information Relay outputs Quantity 6 Power supply V DC 24 V DC Description 12 digital inputs (4 inputs available as analog inputs) 6 relay outputs LCD display
Emax DC. Annex to the technical catalogue. Low voltage Switch-disconnectors and Automatic circuit-breakers for Direct Current Applications
Annex to the technical catalogue Emax DC Low voltage Switch-disconnectors and Automatic circuit-breakers for Direct Current Applications 1SDC200012D0201 Index SACE Emax DC automatic circuit-breakers...
Circuit Breakers and Switchgear. Thomas Greer Director of Engineering TLG Services
Circuit Breakers and Switchgear Thomas Greer Director of Engineering TLG Services Presentation Outline Switchgear Definition Overcurrent Protection Devices Circuit Breaker Trip Curves and Coordination
PowerPact D-Frame Circuit Breakers and Switches 150 to 600 A
PowerPact D-Frame Circuit Breakers and Switches 150 to 600 A Catalog 0616CT0801R04/11 2011 Class 0616 CONTENTS Description............................................. Page General Information...........................................5
New SACE Emax 2 for UL 1066 From Circuit Breaker to Power Manager
New SACE Emax 2 for UL 1066 From Circuit Breaker to Power Manager 2 1SDC200039B0201 New SACE Emax 2 for UL 1066 Circuit breakers switch power SACE Emax 2 manages it. SACE Emax 2 is the new benchmark of
Electronic overload relay EF19 and EF45
Data sheet Electronic overload relay EF19 and EF45 Electronic overload relays offer reliable protection in case of overload and phase-failure. They are the alternative to thermal overload relays. Motor
ABB 1 NEW. Three-phase monitoring relay for grid feeding CM-UFS.1. Data sheet. Features. Approvals. Marks. Order data. Order data - Accessories
2CDC 251 014 F0t09 Features Monitoring of three-phase mains for grid feeding Type-tested in accordance with DIN V VDE V 0126-1-1: February 2006 Neutral conductor connection configurable Can also be used
NF71E-.. / NFZ71E-.. Contactor Relays AC / DC Operated - with Screw Terminals
Technical Datasheet 1SBC101433D0201 28/03/11 NF71E-.. / NFZ71E-.. Contactor Relays AC / DC Operated - with Screw Terminals NF(Z) contactor relays are used for switching auxiliary and control circuits.
Submit shop drawings for equipment provided under this section Shop drawings shall indicate:
Section 16435 - SWITCHBOARDS Introduction Part 1 - General Reference The work under this section is subject to requirements of the Contract Documents including the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions,
Capacitor Protection Relay SPAJ 160 C. Product Guide
Issued: April 1999 Status: Updated Version: C/19.04.2006 Data subject to change without notice Features One-, two- and three-phase overload stage with definite time characteristic One-, two- and three-phase
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH. Changeover Type from 250A to 2500A
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH Changeover Type from 250A to 2500A Table of Contents Preamble 1.1 Theoretical base 1.2 Selection the size of automatic transfer switch 1.3 Automatic transfer switch components
Low voltage electrical distribution. Electronic trip units. User manual 09/2009
Low voltage electrical distribution Electronic trip units User manual 09/2009 Schneider Electric assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document. If you have any suggestions for
CIRCUIT BREAKER INTERRUPTING CAPACITY AND SHORT-TIME CURRENT RATINGS
CIRCUIT BREAKER INTERRUPTING CAPACITY AND SHORT-TIME CURRENT RATINGS David D. Roybal, P.E. Senior Member, IEEE Eaton Electrical 3697 Mount Diablo Boulevard Lafayette, CA 94549 Abstract Low-voltage circuit
ABB 1. Three-phase monitoring relay CM-PFS. Data sheet. Features. Approvals. Marks. Order data. Order data - Accessories. Application.
1SR 430 824 F9300 Features Monitoring of three-phase mains for phase sequence and failure Powered by the measuring circuit 2 c/o (SPDT) contacts 1 LED for status indication Approvals R: yellow LED - relay
Electronic overload relay EF65, EF96 and EF146
Data sheet Electronic overload relay EF65, EF96 and EF146 Electronic overload relays offer reliable protection in case of overload and phase-failure. They are the alternative to thermal overload relays.
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES 1. INTRODUCTION In order to ensure safety of people, protection of equipment and, to a certain extent, continuity of supply, insulation co-ordination aims at reducing the likelihood
Magnetic and Hydraulic-Magnetic Circuit Breaker 8340-G2...
Magnetic and Hydraulic-Magnetic Circuit Breaker 840-G2... Description Single, two and three pole magnetic circuit breakers with trip-free mechanism and push/pull on/off manual actuation. A choice of fast
White paper. ABB solutions for switching and protection of low speed wind turbines
White paper ABB solutions for switching and protection of low speed wind turbines ABB solutions for switching and protection of low speed wind turbines Index 1 Introduction...2 2 Full converter configuration...4
Disturbance Recoder SPCR 8C27. Product Guide
Issued: April 1999 Status: Updated Version: C/26.04.2006 Data subject to change without notice Features Versatile digital disturbance recorder module for recording various phenomena in the electric power
RM4TG20 three-phase network control relay RM4-T - range 200..500 V
Characteristics three-phase network control relay RM4-T - range 200..500 V Complementary [Us] rated supply voltage Output contacts Setting accuracy of time delay Delay at power up Measuring cycle Marking
3K Load-Break Switches The Program for Safety and Performance. sentric
3K Load-Break Switches The Program for Safety and Performance sentric Whether for reliable switching and isolation under load, or for protection against overload or short-circuits our 3K range of load-break
PSR The compact range Description
Description The PSR range is the most compact of all the ABB softstarter ranges, thereby making it possible to fit many devices into the same enclosure. The system concept with Manual Motor Starters provides
Voltage monitoring relays CM-ESS.2 For single-phase AC/DC voltages
Data sheet Voltage monitoring relays CM-ESS.2 For single-phase AC/DC voltages The CM-ESS.2 is an electronic voltage monitoring relay that provides reliable monitoring of voltages as well as detection of
Products and solutions for pumping, irrigation and piping
Products and solutions for pumping, irrigation and piping 100% electricity www.lovatoelectric.com Tra dition and Innovation LOVATO Electric S.p.A. - Bergamo - Italy Since 1922 The first LOVATO Electric
Specification guide no. 9 Active harmonic conditioner from 20 to 480 A
Active harmonic conditioner from 20 to 480 A Contents 1 - Installations concerned... 2 1.1 - New installations... 2 1.2 - Existing installations... 2 2 - General... 2 2.1 - Scope... 2 2.2 - Applicable
E-STOP relays, safety gate monitors
Unit features Safety features Gertebild ][Bildunterschrift_NOT_Sch.tuer_Licht Safety relay for monitoring E-STOP pushbuttons, safety gates and light beam devices Approvals Gertemerkmale Positive-guided
Positive-guided relay outputs: 3 safety contacts (N/O), instantaneous. 1 auxiliary contact (N/C), instantaneous
Safety relay for monitoring E-STOP pushbuttons. Approvals Unit features Positive-guided relay outputs: 3 safety contacts (N/O), instantaneous 1 auxiliary contact (N/C), instantaneous Safe separation of
LV power circuit breaker and switch-disconnectors. Masterpact NW Direct current 1000 to 4000 A. << Back. Catalogue
Manual motor starter MS116
Data sheet Manual motor starter MS116 Manual motor starters are electromechanical devices for motor and circuit protection. These devices offer local motor disconnect means, manual ON/ OFF control, and
Technicaldata General
Currenttransformer-operatedoverloadrelay,60-90A,1N/O+1N/C Partno. ZW7-90 Articleno. 002618 CatalogNo. XTOT090C3S Deliveryprogramme Product range ZW7 current transformer-operated overload relays Description
Inductive Sensors Single or Dual Loop Detectors Type LD with teach-in
Inductive Sensors Single or Dual Loop Detectors Type LD with teach-in Single or Dual loop detector Automatically adjustment of detection level Manual sensitivity for compensations of variations Easy installation
Phone: 800.894.0412 - Fax: 888.723.4773 - Web: www.clrwtr.com - Email: [email protected]
Product description Wide rated operational voltage 208 600 V AC Wide rated control supply voltage 100 250 V, 50/60 Hz Rated operational current 18 to 370 A Wide ambient temperature range, -25 to +60 ºC
Technical catalogue. Modular DIN rail components Installation contactors
Technical catalogue Modular DIN rail components Installation contactors Installation Contactors Overview... ESB Installation Contactors 0 A / AC-/AC-7a ESB0...4 4 A / AC-/AC-7a ESB4...5 40 A / AC-/AC-7a
Functional system Prisma P
Enclosures and cubicles Functional system Prisma P Catalogue Prisma functional system Contents general page Index 2 Choice of switchboards 6 Prisma P functional system 11 b General presentation 12 b Installation
Dimensions, Inches (mm) No. of Poles Width Height Depth 2, 3 8.25 (210) 16 (407) 5.5 (140) 4 11.125 (283) 16 (407) 5.5 (140)
9-10N Supersedes Selection Data 9-10N, pages, 1-, dated dated March March 1995 1995 Mailed to: E, D, C/9-100A, 31-A, INTERRUPTING CAPACITY RATINGS IEC 947- Interrupting Capacity s➀ Interrupting Capacity
Bimetallic Overload Relay Specifications
Technical Data Bimetallic Overload Relay Specifications Bulletin Number 193K, 193T1 Topic Page Product Overview 2 Standards compliance and Certifications 2 General Specifications 193K 3 Approximate Dimensions
RM35UA13MW. range 15..600 V. Main. Product or component type. Relay monitored parameters
Characteristics multifunction voltage control relay RM35-U - range 15..600 V Complementary Reset time Maximum switching voltage [Us] rated supply voltage Supply voltage limits Power consumption in W Main
Type: DILM115(RAC240) Article No.: 239548 Sales text Contactor,55kW/400V,AC operated. Ordering information
Type: DILM115(RAC240) Article No.: 239548 Sales text Contactor,55kW/400V,AC operated Ordering information Connection technique Description Description Rated operational current Screw terminals 3 pole AC
The Intelligent AX1 Switchgear for Medium Voltage
The Intelligent AX1 Switchgear for Medium Voltage Leif Lundin, Manager of Research and Development, Division Medium Voltage and Compact Substations, ABB Distribution, Sweden Abstract The newly launched
Secondary Unit Substations
14 SWITCHGEAR Secondary Unit Substations Overview Siemens offers a wide variety of unit substation designs to meet customer requirements. A unit substation consists of one or more transformers mechanically
Mini Motor Contactor J7KNA Main contactor Accessories Approved Standards Standard Guide No (US,C) Ordering Information tage Model Number Legend gear
Mini Motor Contactor J7KNA ) Main contactor AC & DC operated Integrated auxiliary contacts Screw fixing and snap fitting (35 mm DIN-rail) Range from 4 to 5.5 (AC 3, 380/415V) 4 -main pole version (4 AC
PNOZsigma - Base units
PNOZsigma - Base units Register Login Sensors Control and Communication Electronic monitoring relays Safety Relays PNOZ X PNOZsigma PNOZelog PNOZmulti PNOZpower Configurable control systems Programmable
